final eia and emp report for - welcome to environment · 3.7.2 wind rose 3-6 3.8 ambient air...

FINAL EIA AND EMP REPORT FOR

PROPOSED STEEL PLANT Plant Configuration - Pellet Plant (800 TPD),

DRI (600 TPD), Induction Furnace (1000 TPD), Rolling Mill (975 TPD) &

Captive Power Plant (12 MW))

OF

M/s Genext Steels Private Limited

LOCATED AT

Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 & 1823, Village: Bagodara,

Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat

Project or Activity: 3(a), Category: A

[ToR Letter No: F. No. J-11011/501/2017 -IA.II(I), dated 19.06.2018]

PREPARED BY

SHIVALIK SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT LIMITED QCI/NABET EIA CONSULTANT ORGANIZATIONS

Registered Office:

Village Majra, Post Office Dabhota, Tehsil Nalagarh

Distt. Solan, Himachal Pradesh - 174101

Corporate Office:

SCO 20-21, 2nd Floor, Near Hotel Dolphin, Baltana,

Zirakpur Punjab- 140 604

Phone/Telefax : 01762 – 509496

Contents of Final EIA of M/s. Genext Steels Private Limited

Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited I

Contents Particulars Page No.

Index I

List of Tables IX

List of Figures XI

List of Annexures XII

Index Chapter 1 Introduction Page No.

1.1 Preface 1-1

1.2 Purpose of the Report 1-1

1.3 Identification of Project & Project Proponent 1-2

1.3.1 Identification of Project 1-2

1.3.2 Identification of Project Proponent 1-3

1.4 Brief description of project 1-3

1.4.1 Nature of the project 1-3

1.4.2 Size of the project 1-3

1.4.3 Project Location 1-4

1.5 Importance of the project 1-5

1.6 Applicable environmental regulatory framework 1-6

1.7 Scope of the EIA study 1-7

1.8 Methodology for EIA 1-8

1.9 Compliance of Terms of Reference (ToRs) 1-8

1.10 List of Industries surrounding project site 1-20

1.11 Structure of report 1-20

Chapter 2 Project Description

2.1 Introduction 2-1

2.2 Need of the project 2-1

2.3 Location of the Project 2-2

2.4 Size or magnitude of operation 2-6

2.4.1 Land breakup & project site layout 2-6

2.4.2 Project Magnitude 2-7

2.5 Input Requirements 2-7

2.6 Proposed schedule for approval and implementation 2-11

2.7 Technology & process description 2-11


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited II

2.8 Utilities and auxiliary services 2-24

2.9 Generation of pollutants 2-24

2.9.1 Wastewater generation 2-24

2.9.2 Gaseous emission 2-24

2.9.3 Stack height calculation for all plants 2-25

2.9.4 Hazardous and solid waste generation 2-28

2.9.5 Noise Generation 2-29

2.10 Pollution control strategy 2-29

2.10.1 Effluent management 2-29

2.10.2 Air pollution control measures 2-31

2.10.3 Fugitive emission control 2-31

2.10.4 Hazardous and solid waste management 2-32

2.10.5 Noise pollution control measures 2-32

2.11 Rain water harvesting 2-33

2.12 Green Belt Development 2-33

2.13 Occupational health & safety 2-33

Chapter 3 Description of Environment

3.1 General 3-1

3.2 Study area 3-1

3.3 Study Period 3-2

3.4 Source of environmental data generation 3-2

3.5 Methodology 3-3

3.6 Land Environment 3-3

3.6.1 Land use pattern of the Study Area 3-3

3.6.2 Objective of Land Use Studies 3-3

3.6.3 Topography 3-5

3.6.4 Seismicity of the area 3-5

3.7 Meteorology 3-5

3.7.1 Site specific micro-meteorological data 3-6

3.7.2 Wind Rose 3-6

3.8 Ambient air quality 3-7

3.8.1 Introduction 3-7

3.8.2 Design of Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations 3-7

3.8.3 Reconnaissance 3-7

3.8.4 Parameters, Frequency and monitoring Methodology 3-7

3.8.5 Interpretation of result 3-8


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited III

3.9 Geology & Hydrogeology of study area 3-9

3.9.1 Geology 3-9

3.9.2 Hydrogeology 3-9

3.10 Water quality 3-11

3.10.1 Introduction 3-11

3.10.2 Sampling Frequency, Techniques & Methodology 3-12

3.10.3 Surface Water Quality (Primary data) 3-13

3.10.4 Ground Water Quality 3-13

3.10.5 Interpretation 3-13

3.10.6 Conclusion 3-14

3.11 Noise Environment 3-14

3.11.1 Instrument used for Sampling and Monitoring 3-14

3.11.2 Noise Quality Monitoring Locations 3-15

3.11.3 Ambient Noise Standards 3-15

3.11.4 Results 3-15


3.12 Soil Environment 3-15

3.12.1 Soil sampling locations 3-16

3.12.2 Methodology 3-16

3.12.3 Corollaries 3-17


3.13 Biological Environment 3-18

3.13.1 Period of the study 3-19

3.13.2 Study methodology 3-19

3.13.3 Floral species in the study area 3-19

3.13.4 Fauna in the study area 3-19

3.14 Traffic survey 3-19

3.15 Socio Economic Environment 3-20

3.15.1 Objective of the study 3-20

3.15.2 Land use pattern and infrastructure 3-21

3.15.3 Demographic and Socio-Economic Environment 3-21

3.15.4 Living Standard and Infrastructure 3-22

Chapter 4 Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

4.1 General 4-1

4.2 Identification of Impact 4-1

4.2.1 Identification of Impacting Activities 4-2


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited IV

4.2.2 Identification of Environment Attributes 4-2

4.3 Impact on Topography 4-3

4.4 Impact on Air Environment 4-3

4.4.1 Air Pollution Dispersion modeling of stack 4-4

4.4.2 Model input data 4-5

4.4.3 Output of the model 4-6

4.4.4 Incremental & cumulative concentration of pollutants 4-6


4.5 Impact on Water Environment 4-6

4.6 Impact on Noise Environment 4-8

4.7 Impact on Land Environment 4-9

4.8 Impact on Biological Environment 4-10

4.9 Impact on Socio-Economic Environment 4-11

4.10 Impact on Occupational Health & Safety 4-12

4.11 Prediction of impact due to vehicular movement 4-13

Chapter 5 Analysis of Alternatives

5.1 Prologue 5-1

5.2 Site Alternative 5-1

5.3 Process Alternative 5-3

Chapter 6 Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1 Prelude 6-1

6.2 Environment Monitoring Program 6-1

6.3 Objective of Monitoring Plan 6-1

6.4 Schedule for Environment Monitoring 6-2

6.5 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 6-2

6.6 Wastewater Monitoring 6-2

6.7 Ambient noise level monitoring 6-2

Chapter 7 Additional Studies

(A) Risk Assessment 7-1


7.2 Study objective 7-1

7.3 Hazardous identification 7-1

7.3.1 Identification of source of Ignition 7-2

7.3.2 Identification of sources of Fire & Explosion 7-2

7.3.3 Thermal radiation 7-3

7.3.4 Physical hazards onsite 7-3


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited V

7.3.5 Loading/Unloading operation/Storage 7-3

7.3.6 Silo cleaning operation 7-3

7.3.7 Steel Melting Shop 7-4

7.3.8 Electrical Hazard 7-4

7.3.9 Dust and Gas 7-4

7.3.10 Captive Power plant (CPP Unit) 7-4

7.3.11 Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB Unit) 7-5

7.3.12 Respiratory Hazards 7-5

7.3.13 Noise 7-6

7.3.14 Fire & Explosion Hazards 7-6

7.3.15 Heat and Hot Liquid 7-6

7.3.16 Fire & Explosion Index 7-6

7.3.17 Heat Stress 7-8

7.4 Mitigation measures 7-8

7.4.1 Coal handling plant 7-8

7.4.2 Induction Furnace 7-9

7.4.3 Control Rooms 7-9

7.4.4 Gas Explosion, Prevention & Preventive Measure 7-9

7.4.5 Mitigation measure for Hot Metal spillage 7-10

7.4.6 Electrical safety 7-10

7.4.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 7-12

7.5 Natural calamities which may lead to emergency 7-13

7.5.1 Heat stroke 7-13

7.5.2 Earthquake 7-13

7.5.3 Cyclone 7-15

7.5.4 Flood 7-17

7.6 General Safety Precautions & Occupational Health 7-18

7.7 Risk Reduction Measures 7-20

7.8 General Working Conditions 7-21

7.8.1 Safe Operating Procedures 7-21

7.8.2 Work Permit System 7-21

7.8.3 Personnel Protective Equipment (PPEs) 7-21

7.8.4 Emergency Preparedness 7-21

7.8.5 Static Electricity 7-22

7.8.6 Access 7-22

7.8.7 Material handling 7-22


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited VI

7.8.8 Communication System 7-22

7.8.9 First Aid Facilities 7-22

7.8.10 Accident Reporting, Investigation and Analysis 7-22

7.8.11 Safety Inspections 7-22

7.8.12 Safe Operating Procedures 7-22

7.9 Disaster Management Plan (DMP) 7-23

7.9.1 Objectives 7-23

7.9.2 Elements of On-Site Emergency Plan 7-23

7.9.3 Organization 7-23

7.9.4 Duty Allocation 7-23

7.10 Industrial Hazards and Safety 7-25

7.10.1 Hazard Identification 7-25

7.11 On-Site Management Plan 7-25

7.11.1 Objectives, Scope and Contents of On-Site Emergency Plan 7-25

7.11.2 Scope of Onsite Emergency Plan 7-26

7.11.3 Emergency 7-27

7.11.4 Methodology 7-27

7.11.5 Structure of Emergency Management 7-27

7.11.6 Infrastructure at Emergency Control Centre 7-28

7.11.7 Assembly Point 7-29

7.11.8 Emergency Management Training 7-29

7.11.9 Mock Drills 7-29

7.11.10 Proposed Communication System 7-30

7.11.11 Emergency Medical Facilities 7-30

7.12 Off Site Emergency Plan 7-30

(B) Social Impact Assessment 7-33

(C) Public Consultation 7-40

Chapter 8 Project Benefits


8.2 Improvement in Physical Infrastructure 8-1

8.3 Improvement in Social Infrastructure 8-1

8.4 Employment Potential 8-1

8.5 Socio-Economic Development Activities Proposed 8-2

8.5.1 How to utilize CER funds 8-2

8.6 Other Tangible Benefits 8-3

Chapter 9 Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis 9-1

Chapter 10 Environment Management Plan


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited VII


10.2 Environmental Management During Construction Phase 10-1

10.2.1 Air & Noise Environment 10-2

10.2.2 Water Supply & Sanitation 10-2

10.2.3 Waste 10-2

10.2.4 Socio-Economic Environment 10-2

10.2.5 Health & Safety 10-2

10.3 Environmental Management during the Operational Phase 10-3

10.3.1 Air Pollution Control 10-3

10.3.1.1 Source of Air Pollution & Control Measures 10-3

10.3.1.2 Action Plan for Control of Fugitive Emission 10-4

10.3.2 Water Environment 10-5

10.3.3 Hazardous & Solid waste management 10-7

10.3.4 Noise Control 10-8

10.3.5 Green Belt Development 10-8

10.3.6 Occupational Health Hazard & Mitigation Measures 10-10

10.3.6.1 Personal Protective Equipment 10-12

10.3.6.2 Plans for Periodic Medical Checkup 10-12

10.4 Post Project Environmental Monitoring 10-13

10.5 Environment Management Budget Allocation 10-14

10.6 Environmental Management Cell 10-14

10.6.1 Hierarchical Structure of Environmental Management Cell 10-14

10.6.2 Reporting System of Non-Compliances/Violations of Environmental Norms

10-15

10.6.3 Framework for Continual Improvement of Environmental Performance of Organization

10-16

10.7 Resource Conservation and Cleaner Production 10-16

10.8 Energy conservation programme 10-17

10.9 Socio-Economic Environment 10-17

Chapter 11 Summary & Conclusion

11.1 Project Description 11-1

11.1.1 General Introduction 11-1

11.1.2 Project location & Environment sensitivity 11-1

11.1.3 Salient features of the project 11-2

11.1.4 Investment of the project 11-2

11.1.5 List of Products 11-2

11.2 Description of Environment 11-3


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited VIII

11.2.1 Baseline Environmental Study 11-3

11.2.2 Air Environment 11-3

11.2.3 Water Environment 11-4

11.2.4 Noise Environment 11-5

11.2.5 Soil Quality 11-5

11.2.6 Biological Environment 11-6

11.2.7 Socio-Economic Environment 11-6

11.3 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures 11-6

11.3.1 Summary of Impacts on Air Environment 11-6

11.3.2 Summary of Impacts on Water Environment 11-7

11.3.3 Impacts on Noise quality & Mitigation measures 11-8

11.3.4 Summary of Impacts on Land Environment 11-8

11.3.5 Summary of Impact on Socio Economy 11-8

11.3.6 Summary of Impact on Ecology 11-9

11.4 Environment Monitoring Programme 11-9

11.5 Additional Studies 11-9

11.5.1 Risk Assessment 11-9

11.6 Project Benefits 11-10

11.7 Environmental Management Plan 11-10

11.8 Conclusion 11-12

Chapter-12 Disclosure of Consultant engaged

12.1 Brief resume and Nature of Consultancy Rendered by Shivalik Solid

Waste Management Limited

12-1

12.2 Brief about San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. 12-3


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited IX

List of Tables Table No. Name Page No.

1.1 Product details 1-4

1.2 Salient features of the project site 1-4

1.3 Compliance to Terms of Reference issued by MoEF&CC 1-8

2.1 Land use planning 2-6

2.2 List of products with its capacity 2-7

2.3 Plant facility 2-7

2.4 Raw material requirement 2-8

2.5 Typical compositions of main raw material (Iron-Ore/Iron Oxide) 2-8

2.6 Breakup of water consumption & w/w generation 2-9

2.7 Details of fuel consumption 2-11

2.8 Energy Balance 2-23

2.9 Details of stacks 2-26

2.10 Estimated Air Emission quality 2-27

2.11 Details of Hazardous & solid waste 2-28

2.12 Range of chemical compositions in slag 2-29

2.13 Characteristic of effluent 2-30

2.14 Details of ETP units 2-30

2.15 Technical specification of Induction Furnace 2-34

2.16 Technical specification of ESP 2-34

2.17 Typical Technical specification of Bag filter 2-35

3.1 Environmental setting of the study area 3-2

3.2 Land use statistics work out based on satellite imaginary 3-5

3.3 Monitoring Methodology of Meteorological Data 3-6

3.4 Meteorological Data for the Monitoring Period (Jan to March, 2018) 3-6

3.5 Methodology of Ambient Air Monitoring 3-8

3.6 Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling 3-8

3.7 Sampling locations with source & date of sampling 3-12

3.8 Monitoring Methodology of Noise 3-15

3.9 Location of soil sampling 3-16

3.10 Methodology of Soil Sample analysis 3-16

3.11 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations 3-23

3.12 Ambient Air Quality Status 3-24

3.13 Ambient Air Quality Status (PM10) 3-25

3.14 Ambient Air Quality Status (PM2.5) 3-26


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited X

3.15 Ambient Air Quality Status (SO2) 3-27

3.16 Ambient Air Quality Status (NOx) 3-28

3.17 Ambient Air Quality Status (CO, HC (Methane & non-Methane), VOC) 3-29

3.18 National Ambient Air Quality Standards 3-30

3.19 Results of Groundwater Quality in the Study Area 3-31

3.20 Surface water analysis of Study Area 3-32

3.21 Indian Standard Specification for Drinking Water 3-33

3.22 Ambient Noise Levels in the Study Area 3-34

3.23 Ambient Air Quality Standards with respect to Noise 3-34

3.24 Soil Analysis of Study area 3-35

3.25 Floral Diversity 3-36

3.26 Faunal Biodiversity 3-38

3.27 Traffic Survey 3-40

3.28 Land Use Pattern 3-41

3.29 Summary of Socio-Economic Status of Study area (Demography) 3-42

3.30 Summary of Socio-Economic Status of Study area (Amenities) 3-43

4.1 Input data for air quality modeling 4-16

4.2 Cumulative Concentrations at various locations 4-17

4.3 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SPM 4-18

4.4 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SO2 4-19

4.5 The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for NOx 4-20

6.1 Environment Monitoring Plan 6-3

7.1 List of Damages Envisaged at Various Heat Loads 7-3

7.2 Degree of Hazards Based on F&EI 7-7

7.3 Calculated Degree of Hazards for Genext 7-7

7.4 Details of Fire Fighting Facilities onsite 7-11

7.5 Summary of Recommended PPE According to Hazard 7-12

7.6 Emergency recovery plan 7-15

7.7 PEL level Summary as per OSHA 7-19

7.8 Organization Chart 7-23

7.9 Detailed expenditure for CER activities 7-38

7.10 Point raised during public hearing 7-40

10.1 List of PPEs 10-12

10.2 Environment Monitoring Plan 10-13

10.3 Budget Allocation for Environment Management 10-14

10.4 Detailed expenditure for CER activities 10-18


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited XI

List of Figures

Figure No.

Name Page No.

2.1 Location of the project site 2-3

2.2 Satellite image 2-4

2.3 Image showing all boundary coordinates of the site 2-4

2.4 Eco-Sensitive Zone Map of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary 2-5

2.5 Plant Layout 2-6

2.6 Water Balance Diagram 2-10

2.7 Overall flow chart with material balance of raw materials and

products

2-23

3.1 Land use map 3-4

3.2 Graphical representation of ambient air quality 3-24

3.3 Graphical representation for PM10 3-25

3.4 Graphical representation for PM2.5 3-26

3.5 Graphical representation for SO2 3-27

3.6 Graphical representation for NOx 3-28

3.7 Location of AAQM station 3-45

3.8 Wind Rose Diagram 3-46

3.9 Water sampling Locations 3-47

3.10 Noise monitoring Locations 3-48

3.11 Soil Sampling Locations 3-49

3.12 Topo sheet of location with site location map of 10 km radius 3-50

4.1 Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SPM 4-21

4.2 Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SO2 4-22

4.3 Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for NOx 4-23

10.1 Environment Management Cell 10-15


Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited XII

List of Annexures

Sr. No. Annexures Page no.

I. NABET-QCI Certificates A–1

II. CGWA Application A–3

III. Photographs of the Site A–11

IV. Land Possession Documents A–13

V. Interest letter from Brick manufacturers A–19

VI. Rain water Harvesting plan A–20

VII. EHS Policy A–23

VIII. Undertaking from Project Proponent A–24

IX. Undertaking from Consultants A–25

X. Copy of Terms of Reference (TOR) A–26

XI. public hearing proceedings A-41

Chapter 1 of Final EIA of M/s. Genext Steels Private Limited

Prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited 1-1

Chapter-1

Introduction

1.1 PREFACE

An Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is an assessment of the possible impacts

that a proposed project may have on the environment - consisting of the environmental,

social and economic aspects. It is an assessment and management tool that evaluates

the possible impacts, positive or negative, that a proposed project may have on the

environment. EIA systematically examines both beneficial and adverse consequences of

the project and ensures that these effects are taken into account during project design.

The purpose of the assessment is to ensure that decision makers consider the ensuing

environmental impacts when deciding to proceed with a project. In India, Ministry of

Environment, Forest & Climate Change (MoEF&CC) has made prior Environmental

Clearance (EC) for certain developmental projects mandatory through its notification

issued on 14th September, 2006 and its subsequent amendment thereof.

1.2 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

India’s economic growth is contingent upon the growth of the Indian steel industry. It is

traditionally considered the backbone of national economic development. Steel

industry has tremendous forward and backward linkages in terms of material flow,

income and employment generation. Steel plays a vital role in the development of any

modern and emerging economy.

Industrialization and infrastructure development have increased economic growth and

improved living standards of people in India. However, development has led to rapid

consumption of natural resources and increased emissions of waste. To control the

pollution from industrial activity; government has framed regulations which are

governed by MoEF&CC in India. EC is mandatory as per the EIA Notification issued by

MoEF&CC, New Delhi dated 14th September, 2006 and its subsequent amendment for

setting up a new projects or activities, or expansion or modernization of existing

projects or activities based on their potential environmental impacts as indicated in the

Schedule to the notification, being undertaken in any part of India.

The proposed project activity has both positive and negative impacts on the

environment. The negative impacts include environmental degradation and adverse

socio economic changes. It is the responsibility of the company to document the

associated positive and negative impacts, so that the attempts can be made to minimize



the effects due to the negative impacts and maximize the benefits due to the positive

impacts. In this regards, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental

Management Plan (EMP) have been considered as the most important documentation

in understanding the environmental implications and safeguarding the environment.

The proposed project activity is listed at S. No. 3(a) Metallurgical Industries (ferrous &

non-ferrous) under Category “A” of EIA Notification, 2006 and its subsequent

amendments and the proposal will be appraised at Central level. Therefore, prior

Environmental Clearance is required from MoEF&CC for the proposed project of

Genext Steels Pvt. Ltd.

In order to obtain Environmental Clearance for the proposed Steel plant, Form-1,

proposed TOR along with Pre-Feasibility Report were submitted to the Honorable

Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi.

Presentation was made before the Expert Appraisal Committee of MoEF&CC on

14.11.2017 for the approval of Terms of Reference (TOR) for EIA study. Subsequently

ToR was issued by MoEF&CC on 19.06.2018. Public hearing was completed based on

the Draft EIA report submitted to Gujarat Pollution Control Board (GPCB). Minutes of

meeting of public hearing is attached as Annexure-XI. Final EIA/EMP report prepared

incorporating point raised during the Public hearing. Final EIA report will be submitted

to MoEF&CC for EC.

EIA Consultant

In view of the above, baseline monitoring work has been carried out for all the

environmental attributes by M/s. San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. (SEPL), Ahmedabad and final

EIA report is prepared by Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited (SSWML).

SEPL is accredited as Category-A organization under the QCI-NABET Scheme for

accreditation of EIA consultant Organizations and Category-B for specific sector 3(a) for

preparing EIA-EMP report. SSWML is accredited as Category-A organization under the

QCI-NABET Scheme for accreditation of EIA consultant Organizations and also

Category-A for specific sector 3(a) for preparing EIA-EMP report.

1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT

1.3.1 Identification of Project

Genext Steels Private Limited proposes to set up mini integrated steel plant with power

plant at Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat. The proposed

project activity is categorized as Category ‘A’ project and listed at S. No. 3(a) as per the

EIA Notification, 2006 and amendment therein.



The manufacturing technology inter-alia include manufacturing of pellets through

rotary kilns/travelling Grate; manufacturing of Sponge Iron through Rotary kilns;

manufacturing of MS Billets through Induction Furnace along with Concast;

manufacturing of Structural Steel, TMT bars & rolled products through Rolling Mill;

Power generation through WHRB & FBC Boiler.

1.3.2 Identification of Project Proponent

Genext Steels Private Limited is public limited registered under company act in the year

2013. List of Directors/Background/Experience is given below:

i) Mr. Vinod Kedia - a commerce graduate having 25 years of experience in steel

manufacturing.

ii) Mr. Rakesh Bansal, a commerce graduate having 30 years of experience in steel

melting and structural manufacturing.

iii) Mr. Rajesh Naredi, a commerce graduate having 25 years of experience in

manufacturers of ceiling/table fans and other accessories.

iv) Mr. Pankaj Jindal, a Business Management Graduate having 20 years of

experience in pipe manufacturing.

v) Mr. Vineet Kedia, a Business management graduate having 10 years of experience

in steel manufacturing and commercial aspects.

1.4 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

1.4.1 Nature of the project

Proposed steel project comprises of Pellet plant, Direct Reduced Iron (DRI) Plant,

Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill & Power Plant. The proposed project consists of

establishing an integrated steel making facility using following raw materials.

Unit Description

Pellet Manufacturing of pellet using iron ore/iron oxide (mill scale),

bentonite, and imported coal as raw materials

DRI Kiln Manufacturing of Sponge Iron using pellet, imported coal, and

dolomite as raw materials

Induction Furnace Manufacturing of MS Billets using Sponge Iron, M S Scrap, and Ferro

Alloys as raw materials

Rolling Mill Manufacturing of Rolled products using Billets

Power plant By utilizing hot waste flue gases from DRI kilns in WHRB.

By utilizing Coal & Dolochar in FBC boiler as fuel.

1.4.2 Size of the project

The proposed steel plant is proposed to manufacture following products.



Table 1.1 Product details

Sr. No.

Production Unit Product Plant Configuration

Production Capacity

1 Pellet Plant Pellets 4 x 200 TPD 800 TPD

2 DRI Kilns Sponge Iron 4 x 150 TPD 600 TPD

3 Steel Melting Shop MS Billets Induction

furnace: 4 x 25

MT/heat

CCM: Eight-

strand billet

caster

1000 TPD

4 Rolling Mill Structural steel, TMT bars & Rolled

products

2 x 500 TPD 975 TPD

5 Power Plant

A WHRB Electricity 1 x 7 MW 7 MW

B FBC Electricity 1 x 5 MW 5 MW

1.4.3 Project Location

The proposed project site is located at Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 & 1823,

Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist: Ahmedabad, Gujarat. It is well connected by NH8A

and rail with rest of the country.

The salient features of the project site are presented in below table.

Table 1.2 Salient Features of the project site

Features Details

Location Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist: Ahmedabad

Coordinates of Centre of the

project site

Latitude: 22°37’35.22”N

Longitude: 72° 9’48.72”E

Altitude 50-55 m above MSL

Topography Plain

Seismic Zone Seismic Zone-III

Total plant area 37.82 acres (153061 m2)

Nearest

Human habitation Bagodara, about 2.7 km towards ENE direction

Town Bavla, about 30.45 km towards NE direction

City Ahmedabad, about 50 km towards NE direction

Railway Station Arnej Railway Station, about 12.0 km towards ESE direction

Highway NH8A (A’bad-Rajkot), about 523.45 m towards S direction SH8 (Bagodara-Vataman), about 4.4 km towards ENE direction

Air Port Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel International Airport, Ahmedabad, about 67.0 km towards NE direction

Water body Bhogavo River (Seasonal), about 0.7 km towards S direction



Reserve Forests/National

Park/Wildlife Sanctuary

None within 10 km radius, Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary, about 12 km towards NNW direction

Eco Sensitive Zone (ESZ) ESZ of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary, about 1.9 km towards NNW direction

Historical/Archaeological place None within 10 km radius, Lothal is at distance of 15.0 km towards SE direction

Note: Aerial distances are mentioned in above table

1.5 IMPORTANCE OF THE PROJECT

Steel is a basic commodity for all industrial activities and its consumption marks

industrial prosperity. It is often considered to be an indicator of economic progress of

the country. The Indian steel industry, one of the core industries in India, is more than a

century old when the first integrated steel plant was established by Tata in 1907.

Currently, India is the 4th largest steel producer in the world; presently producing about

90 Million Tonnes of steel and as per the 'National Steel Policy', India is expected to

raise this production to 293 million tonnes by the year 2020.

Today, the Indian steel industry contributes approximately 2% to the country’s GDP

and employs about 5 lakh people directly and about 20 lakh people indirectly. Major

sectors such as infrastructure, engineering, aviation, construction, automobiles, power

plants and railways are dependent on the availability of Iron & Steel. Iron & Steel

industry accelerates industrialization and is, therefore, called the backbone of all

industries.

The Indian steel sector has an advantage of domestic availability of raw materials and

cheap labours. Iron ore is also available in abundant quantities. This abundance has

been providing a major cost advantage to the domestic steel industry. The per capita

steel consumption is generally accepted as yardstick to measure the level of socio-

economic development and living standards of its countrymen. As such no developing

country can afford to ignore steel industry.

Per capita consumption of steel in India is only 46 kg, whereas world average is 150 kg.

Per capita consumption of developed nations like USA is 450 kg. Being a developing

country, the consumption in the country shall increase every year creating a good

demand over the coming years.

Several initiatives mainly, affordable housing, expansion of railway networks,

development of domestic shipbuilding industry, opening up of defense sector for

private participation, and the anticipated growth in the automobile sector, are expected



to create significant demand for steel in the country. The National Steel Policy, 2017,

released by the Government, also aims to increase steel production.

In order to realize the growth potential in the steel industry of India, it is essential to

ensure that the industry can remain competitive. Most developed countries have

regulations that are aimed to protect the domestic steel industry. The Indian steel

industry has comparatively much lesser protection through regulation. Proper

regulation should be adopted by the Government to protect the domestic steel industry.

Benefits:

Project will help to decrease the demand supply gap of steel in the country.

The proposed project will generate lot of employment opportunities for the local

people apart from several indirect benefits. During the construction phase, it is

expected that about 150-200 persons will get employment directly or indirectly

whereas during operation about 500-700 persons will be benefited.

Developmental activities will be carried out in the villages under CER activities.

1.6 APPLICABLE ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

The proposed project will abide and function under the purview of the following Rules,

Acts & Regulations which are formulated by the Govt. of India to protect the

environment and development in a sustainable way.

The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974

The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981

The Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 and their

subsequent amendments

Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 and its subsequent

amendments

The Hazardous & Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016

The Manufacture, Storage and Import or Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989 and its

subsequent amendments

Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016

The Fly Ash Notification

Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 and its amendments

The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991



1.7 SCOPE OF THE EIA STUDY

The scope of the Environment Impact Assessment study is based on the guideline

provided by Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change, Government of India.

EIA study has been carried out in an area of 10 km radius from the boundary of the

proposed site as per the ToRs issued by MoEF&CC.

The scope of the EIA study broadly divided into following phases.

Identification of existing status of physical environment, biological environment

as well as socio economic components in the study area.

Evaluation of present environment factors through analysis of generated and

collected baseline data for one complete season.

Collect & compile secondary data.

Study of various activities of the project and identify the impacts on various

environmental components.

Quantification/prediction of impacts on the various environmental components

due to implementation of the project with respect to existing scenario.

Evaluation of impacts after superimposing the predicted scenario over the

baseline scenario.

Identification and assessment of risks associated with the proposed project and

their appropriate management through proper Risk Assessment (RA).

Formulation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the predicted

impacts; and

Identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored during the

project execution and to suggest post project monitoring.

The baseline data has been collected for the following environmental components,

during January, 2018 to March, 2018, supplemented by data collected from various

Govt. Dept., census publications etc.

Ambient Air Quality

Micrometeorology

Noise Environment

Water Environment (Surface & Ground Water)

Soil Quality

Land use pattern

Ecology & Biodiversity

Demography & Socio-economic aspects



The study will help to determine the present environmental status and likely impacts of

the project in the region. It will help to prepare appropriate EMP for the unit to

minimize the adverse impacts, if any.

1.8 METHODOLOGY FOR EIA

Considering the nature and magnitude of the proposed project, surrounding area and

various guidelines available, an area of 10-km off set/radial distance from the boundary

of the proposed plant site was considered for the purpose of environmental impact

assessment study. The monitoring/sampling locations have been established in

accordance with the guidelines issued by CPCB/MoEF&CC. Data has been analyzed as

per the standard methods for establishing the baseline data and so as to determine the

impact of proposed activity on the same.

1.9 COMPLIANCE OF TERMS OF REFERENCE

The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change prescribed the TORs vide F.

No. “IA-J-11011/501/2017-IA-II(I)” dated 19.06.2018 for undertaking detailed

EIA/EMP study for the purpose of obtaining EC in accordance with the provisions of the

EIA Notification, 2006. Compliance of TORs is as below:

Table 1.3 Compliance to Terms of Reference issued by MoEF&CC

Sr. No. Condition Compliance

Specific TOR

1. Public Hearing to be conducted by the concerned State Pollution Control Board.

Public hearing is completed by GPCB. MoM of public hearing is attached as Annexure-XI.

2. The issues raised during public hearing and commitment of the project proponent on the same along with time bound action plan to implement the commitment and financial allocation thereto should be clearly provided.

Issues raised during the Public hearing along with time bound action plan of commitment and financial allocation is given in in Chapter-7, Table 7.10 (Page no. 7-40).

3. The project proponent should carry out social impact assessment of the project and submit the Corporate Environment Responsibility as per the Ministry’s Office Memorandum vide F. No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated 1st May 2018.

Detailed social impact assessment of the project and CER is given in Chapter-7, (Page no. 7-36).

4. The project proponent shall carry out detailed traffic study of the existing network and impact of the proposed project on the road network. The report shall be placed before the public during the public hearing.

Detailed traffic survey is given in sec. 3.14, page no. 3-19 & Table 3.27, page no. 3-40 of Chapter-3. The report was placed before the public, during public hearing.

ANNEXURE-I GENERIC TERMS OF REFERENCE (ToR) IN RESPECT OF INDUSTRY SECTOR

1. Executive Summary Enclosed as Chapter-11.

2. Introduction



i Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditation.

Details of EIA consultants - SEPL and SSWML are given in Chapter-12 - ‘Disclosure of Consultant engaged’. NABET accreditation certificate is enclosed as Annexure-I.

ii Information about the project proponent. It is described in Chapter-1, Section 1.3.2 (Page no. 1-3).

iii Importance and benefits of the project. Importance of the project is described in Chapter-1, Section 1.5 (Page no. 1-5). Benefits of the project are described in Chapter-8 of EIA report.

3. Project Description

i Cost of project and time of completion. It is described in Chapter-2, Section 2.1 (Paragraph 2; Page no. 2-1).

ii Products with capacities for the proposed project.

It is described in Chapter-2, Section 2.4.2 (Page no. 2-7).

iii If expansion project, details of existing products with capacities and whether adequate land is available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if any.

Not applicable (New project proposal).

iv List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of transportation.

List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of transportation is given in in Chapter 2, Table 2.4 (Page no. 2-8).

v Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacities.

There will be no use of any chemicals. Requirement of raw materials and its storage is covered in Chapter 2, Table 2.4 (Page no. 2-8).

vi Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and their management.

Generation of pollutants is described in Chapter-2, Section 2.9 (Page no. 2-24) & its management is given in Section 2.10 (Page no. 2-29).

vii Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement (regular and contract).

Water requirement is given in Chapter-2, Section 2.5 (b), page no. 2-9. Water required for the proposed project will be sourced from Ground Water source. Water drawl permission from CGWA is under process, kindly refer Annexure-II. Power required for the proposed project will be sourced partly from captive power plant & partly from Gujarat State Grid. Refer to Section 2.5 (c), page no. 2-11 of Chapter 2 of EIA report power requirement. Manpower requirement is given in Chapter-2, Section 2.5 (e), page no. 2-11.

viii The project proponent shall furnish the requisite documents from the competent authority in support of drawl of ground water and surface water and supply of electricity.

Water requirement for the proposed project will be sourced from Ground Water source. Water drawl permission from CGWA is under process, kindly refer Annexure-II.



ix Process description along with major equipment and machineries, process flow sheet (Quantitative) from raw material to products to be provided.

Process description is given in Chapter-2, Section 2.7 (Page no. 2-11). Overall flow chart with material balance of raw materials and products is given in Figure 2.7, page no. 2-23. Plant facility is given in Chapter-2, Table 2.3 (Page no. 2-7).

x. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems.

Hazard identification is described in Chapter-7, Section 7.3 (Page no. 7-1); details of proposed safety system are covered in Section 7.6 (Page no. 7-18).

xi. Expansion/modernization proposals: Not applicable (New project proposal).

a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Amendments there to obtain for the project from MoEF&CC/SEIAA shall be attached as an Annexure. A certified copy of the latest Monitoring Report of the Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change as per circular dated 30th May, 2012 on the status of compliance of conditions stipulated in all the existing environmental clearances including Amendments shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of Consent to Operate for the ongoing/existing operation of the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP report.


b. In case the existing project has not obtained environmental clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification 1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies of Consent to Establish/No Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be submitted.


4. Site Details:

i. Location of the project site covering village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and State, Justification for selecting the site, whether other sites were considered.

Location of the project site covering village, Tehsil, District and State is provided in Chapter 1, Table 1.2 (Page no. 1-4); also shown in Chapter 2, Figure 2.1 to 2.3 (Page no. 2-3 to 2-4). Kindly refer to Section 5.2, page no. 5-1 of Chapter 5 of EIA report for Justification for selecting the site & other alternate sites considered.

ii. A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km and site location on

Included in Chapter 3, Figure 3.12 (Page no. 3-50).



1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet. (Including all eco-sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive places).

iii. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site.

Included in Chapter 2, Figure 2.3 (Page no. 2-4).

iv. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site.

Included in Chapter 2, as Figure 2.1 (Page no. 2-3) and Figure 2.2 (Page no. 2-4).

v. Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial Area indicating location of unit within the Industrial area/Estate.

The proposed project is a Greenfield project. Refer Chapter 2, Figure 2.5 (Page no. 2-6) for Plant layout showing proposed units including storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc.

vi. Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. If existing, show photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.

Photographs of the proposed plant site are attached as Annexure-III.

vii. Land use break-up of total land of the project site (identified and acquired), government/private -agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements, etc. shall be included. (Not required for industrial area).

Land use breakup is included in Chapter 2, Table 2.1 (Page 2-6).

viii. A list of major industries with name and type within study area (10km radius) shall be incorporated. Land use details of the study area.

A list of major industries with name and type within study area is provided in Chapter 1, Section 1.10 (Page no. 1-20). Land use details of the study area are included in Chapter 3, Section 3.6 (Page no. 3-3).

ix. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area shall be included.

Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area is included in Chapter 3, Section 3.9 (Page no. 3-9).

x. Details of drainage of the project up to 5km radius of study area. If the site is within 1 km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be provided. (mega green field projects)

Bhogavo River is a seasonal river passing within a 5 km radius which is flow from ENE to WSW. No major river is passing within 1 km from project boundary. No record of flood occurrence found in the region.

xi. Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the land.

The total land envisaged for the proposed project is under possession of the management. Refer Annexure-IV for land documents.

xii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy.

Not applicable as there are no habitation in the land envisaged for the proposed project.

5. Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable):



i. Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of the State Forest Department. (if applicable)

Not applicable, as there is no forest land involved in the proposed project site.

ii. Land use map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site delineating the forestland (in case of projects involving forest land more than 40 ha).


iii. Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry clearance along with latest status shall be submitted.


iv. The projects to be located within 10 km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis-à-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon.

Not applicable, as there no National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals within 10 Km. radius of the project site.

v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Warden of the State Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the study area.

No Schedule I was reported from the study area.

vi. Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife.

Not applicable

6. Environmental Status

i. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall.

Briefly covered in Chapter 3, Section 3.7 (Page 3-5).

ii. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other parameters relevant to the project shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests.

Briefly covered in Chapter 3, Section 3.8 (Page 3-7).

iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations as per frequency given in the NAAQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with -min., max., average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters from data of all AAQ stations should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

Briefly covered in Chapter 3, Table 3.12 to 3.17 (Page 3-24 to 3-29).

iv. Surface water quality of nearby River Unit will not discharge any effluent



(100m upstream and downstream of discharge point) and other surface drains at eight locations as per CPCB /MoEF&CC guidelines.

outside the premises or into water body. Hence no need to take the sample from 100m upstream and downstream of discharge point. Available surface water samples in the study area were collected from six locations. Results are given in Chapter 3, Table 3.20 (Page no. 3-32).

v. Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river identified by the CPCB/MoEF&CC.

No, the site doesn’t fall near to polluted stretch of the river identified by CPCB/MoEF&CC.

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be included.

Covered in Chapter 3, Table 3.19 (Page no. 3-31).

vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study area.

Covered in Chapter 3, Table 3.22 (Page no. 3-34).

viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. Covered in Chapter 3, Table 3.24 (Page no. 3-35).

ix. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles,

frequency of vehicles for transportation of

materials, additional traffic due to

proposed project, parking arrangement

etc.

Detailed traffic survey is given in sec. 3.14, page no. 3-19 & Table 3.27, page no. 3-40 of Chapter-3.

x. Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are found within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be prepared and furnished.

Briefly covered in Chapter 3, Table 3.25 (Page no. 3-36) & 3.26 (Page no. 3-38). No Schedule I was reported in the study area.

xi. Socio-economic status of the study area. Briefly covered in Chapter 3, Section

3.15 (Page no. 3-20); and Table 3.29

(Page no. 3-42) & 3.30 (Page no. 3-43).

7. Impact and Environment Management Plan

i. Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features. In case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modeling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be assessed. Details of the model used and the input data used for modeling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any.

Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutant from the stack emission superimposed on geographical area map based on the site specific meteorological features is covered in Chapter 4, Figure 4.1 to 4.3 (Page no. 4-21 to 4-23). The modeling approach is briefly covered in Chapter 4, Section 4.4.1 (Page no. 4-4). Input parameters used for modeling are provided in Table 4.1 (Page no. 4-16), additional inputs - maximum 50 (24-hr) average concentration values for SPM, SO2, NOx are given in Table 4.3 to 4.5 (Page no. 4-18 to 4-20). Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions on AAQ of the area is given in Table 4.2 (Page No. 4-17).



ii. Water Quality modeling – in case, if the effluent is proposed to be discharged into the local drain, then Water Quality Modelling study should be conducted for the drain water taking into consideration the upstream and downstream quality of water of the drain.

Not applicable, as unit will not discharge effluent in water body.

iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In this regard, options for transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail-cum road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be examined.

Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding environment is provided in Chapter 4, Section 4.11 (Page No. 4-13). The impact of the transport of raw material and the end products on the surrounding environment will be insignificant. Additionally, there is no availability of nearby rail transport.

iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant operations, extent recycled and reused for different purposes shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E(P) Rules.

Treatment on wastewater from different plant operations, extent recycled and reuse for different purposes is briefly described in Chapter 2, Section 2.10.1 (Page No. 2-29). Characteristic of untreated and treated effluent is given in Table 2.13, (Page No. 2-30).

v. Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to meet standards.

Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to meet standards are covered in Chapter 2, Section 2.9.2 (Page no. 2-24) & 2.10.2 (Page no. 2-31).

vi. Measures for fugitive emission control. Measures for fugitive emission control are covered in Chapter 2, Section 2.10.3 (Page no. 2-32) & Chapter 10, Section 10.3.1.2 (Page no. 10-4).

vii. Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and disposal. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous waste in cement plant shall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of waste-minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resource conservation.

Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and management are covered in Chapter 2, Section 2.9.4 (Page no. 2-28), Table 2.11 (Page no. 2-28) & 2.10.4 (Page no. 2-32). Interest letter from brick manufacturer for utilization of Ash generated from the proposed project is attached as Annexure-V. Concepts of resource & energy conservation are covered in Chapter 10, Section 10.7 (Page no. 10-16) & 10.8 (Page no. 10-17).

viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of action shall be provided.

Fly Ash will be given to brick manufacturers in the surrounding areas. Interest letter from brick manufacturer for utilization of Ash generated from the proposed project is attached as Annexure-V.

ix. Action plan for the green belt Layout plan earmarking space for



development plan in 33% area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation; planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the project shall also be incorporated.

development of green belt is provided in Chapter 2, Figure 2.5 (Page no. 2-6). Greenbelt development plan is provided in Chapter 10, Section 10.3.5 (Page no. 10-8).

x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources.

Action plan for rainwater harvesting is provided in Chapter 2, Section 2.11 (Page no. 2-33). Detailed rain water harvesting plan is given in Annexure-VI.

xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/ annum for environmental pollution control measures shall be included.

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures is included in Chapter 10, Section 10.5 (Page no. 10-14).

xii. Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring shall be submitted.

Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring is included in Chapter 10, Section 10.4 (Page no. 10-13).

xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan including Risk Assessment and damage control. Disaster management plan should be linked with District Disaster Management Plan.

Onsite and offsite Disaster (natural and man-made) Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan is included in Chapter 7, Section 7.11 (Page no 7-25) & 7.12 (Page no 7-30).

8. Occupational health

i. Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of above mentioned hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure Level (PEL)? If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be preserved.

Not applicable as this is a new project proposal.

ii. Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers’ health is being evaluated by pre-designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, color vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre-placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last month analyzed data of above mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department wise.

Not Applicable, as this is a greenfield project. However, Medical records of each employee will be maintained separately and will be updated as per finding during monitoring. Age, sex wise, department wise data on the above parameters will be maintained and submitted to the ministry. Medical records of the employee at the end of their term will be updated.

iii. Annual report of health status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety.




iv. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract and casual workers.

Occupational health & safety plan is given in Chapter 10, Section 10.3.6 (Page no. 10-10); and Chapter 7, Section 7.6 (Page no. 7-18). Fund allocation is mentioned in Chapter 10, Section 10.5 (Page no. 10-14).

9. Corporate Environment Policy

i. Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report.

Attached as Annexure-VII. Additionally, company will set up a separate Environment Management Cell and the objectives and duties of it are discussed in Chapter 10, Section 10.6 (Page no. 10-14).

ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process/procedures to bring into focus any infringement/deviation/ violation of the environmental or forest norms/conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA.

Yes

iii. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given.

It is discussed in Chapter 10, Section 10.6.1 (Page no. 10-14).

iv. Does the company have system of reporting of non-compliances/ violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and/or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report.

It is discussed in Chapter 10, Section 10.6.2 (Page no. 10-15).

10. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labor force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

It is discussed in Chapter 10, Section 10.2.2 (Page no. 10-2) and 10.2.5 (Page no. 10-2).

11. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER)

i. To address the Public Hearing issues, an amount as specified under Ministry’s Office Memorandum vide F. No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated 1st May, 2018 amounting to Rs. ______ crores, shall be earmarked by the project proponent, towards Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER). Distinct CER projects shall be prepared on the local public hearing issues. Project estimate shall be prepared based on PWD schedule rates for each distinct Item and schedule for time-bound action plan shall be

Unit has allocated an amount of Rs. 5.22 Crore (2.0% of Total project cost i.e. 261 Crore) towards Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER). It is included in Chapter 10, Section 10.9 (Page no. 10-17) & Table 10.4 (Page no. 10-18).



prepared. These CER projects as indicated by the project proponent shall be implemented along with the main project. Implementation of such program shall be ensured by constituting a Committee comprising of the project proponent, representatives of village Panchayat & District Administration. Action taken report in this regard shall be submitted to the Ministry’s Regional Office. No free distribution/donations and or free camps shall be included in the above CER budget.

12. Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and present status of the case.

No litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project.

13. A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TORs.

Done.

14. The ToRs prescribed shall be valid for a period of three years for submission of the EIA-EMP reports along with Public Hearing proceedings (whenever stipulated).

Noted the point

The following general points shall be noted:

i. All documents shall be properly indexed,

page numbered.

Noted and complied

ii. Period/date of data collection shall be

clearly indicated.

Noted and complied

iii. Authenticated English translation of all

material in Regional language shall be

provided.

Noted and complied

iv. The letter/application for environmental

clearance shall quote the MoEF&CC file no.

and also attach a copy of the letter.

Noted and complied

v. The copy of the letter received from the

Ministry shall be also attached as an

annexure to the final EIA-EMP report.

Complied.

Letter received from MoEF&CC is

attached as Annexure-X.

vi. The index of the final EIA-EMP report

must indicate the specific chapter and

page no. of the EIA-EMP report.

Noted and complied

vii. While preparing the EIA report, the

instructions for the proponents and

instructions for the consultants issued by

MoEF&CC vide O.M. No. J-

11013/41/2006-IA.II (I) dated 4th August,

Instructions were followed.

Undertaking of proponent &

consultant is enclosed as Annexure-

VIII & Annexure-IX.



2009, which are available on the website

of this Ministry shall also be followed.

viii. The consultants involved in the

preparation of EIA-EMP report after the

accreditation with the Quality Council of

India (QCI)/ National Accreditation Board

of Education and Training (NABET) would

need to include a certificate in this regard

in the EIA-EMP Report prepared by them

and data provided by other

organization/Laboratories including their

status of approvals etc. Name of the

Consultant and the Accreditation details

shall be posted in the EIA-EMP report as

well as on the cover of the Hard copy of

the Presentation material for EC

presentation.

Shivalik Solid Waste Management

Limited & San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. are

accredited as Category-A organization

under the QCI-NABET Scheme for

preparing EIA-EMP report.

NABET/QCI certificates of both the

consultants are enclosed as

Annexure-I.

Analysis was performed in MoEF&CC

Recognized Environmental Laboratory

Under EP Act, 1986.

ix. ToRs prescribed by Expert Appraisal

Committee (Industry) shall be considered

for preparation of EIA-EMP report for the

project in addition to Appendix III and IIIA

in the EIA Notification, 2006. Where the

documents provided are in a language

other than English, an English translation

shall be provided. The draft EIA-EMP

report shall be submitted to the state

pollution control board of the concerned

state for conduct of public hearing. The

SPCB shall conduct the public

hearing/public consultation, district-wise,

as per the provision of EIA Notification,

2006. The public hearing shall be chaired

by an Officer not below the rank of

Additional District Magistrate.

The issues raised in the Public Hearing

and during the consultation process and

the commitments made by the project

proponent on the same shall be included

separately in EIA-EMP report in a separate

chapter and summarized in a tabular chart

with financial budget (capital and

revenue) along with time-schedule of

implementation for complying with the

commitments made. The final EIA report

shall be submitted to the Ministry for

obtaining environmental clearance.

Noted & complied.

The GPCB has conducted the public

hearing/public consultation, as per the

provision of EIA Notification, 2006.

Copy of MoM is attached as Annexure-

XI and GPCB has directly sent the MoM

of Public Hearing to MoEFCC, New

Delhi.

Noted the points of the condition and

shall be complied.



ANNEXURE-2 METALLURGICAL INDUSTRIES (FERROUS & NON-FERROUS)

i. Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes and operations, along with material and energy inputs & outputs (material and energy balance).

Complete Process description is given in Chapter-2, Section 2.7 (Page no. 2-11). Overall flow chart with material balance of raw materials and products is given in Figure 2.7 (Page no. 2-23). Energy balance is given in Table 2.8, page no. 2-23 of Chapter-2.

ii. Emission from sulphuric acid plant and Sulphur muck management.

Not Applicable, unit is not going to install Sulphuric acid plant.

iii. Details on installation of Continuous Emission Monitoring System with recording with proper calibration system.

If MoEF&CC enforced as condition in EC then unit will install Continuous Emission Monitoring System with recording.

iv. Details on toxic metals including fluoride emissions.

No such type of emission envisage from the plant.

v. Details on stack height Detailed Stack height calculation for proposed steel plant is given in section 2.9.3, page no. 2-25.

vi. Details on ash disposal and management Details on ash disposal & its management are given in Table 2.11, page no. 2-28. Fly Ash will be sold to brick manufacturers in the surrounding areas. Interest letter from brick manufacturer for utilization of Ash generated from the proposed project is attached as Annexure-V.

vii. Complete process flow diagram describing process of lead/zinc/ copper/aluminium, etc.

Not Applicable as any manufacturing of lead/zinc / copper/aluminium will be involved.

viii. Details on smelting, thermal refining, melting, slag fuming, and Waelz kiln operation.

Not Applicable

ix. Details on Holding and de-gassing of molten metal from primary and secondary aluminum, materials pre-treatment, and from melting and smelting of secondary aluminium.

Not Applicable as unit is not going to hold and de-gassing of molten metal.

x. Details on toxic metal content in the waste material and its composition and end use (particularly of slag).

There will be no usage of any toxic non-ferrous metal. Typical composition of slag is given in Table 2.12, page no. 2-29. Non-hazardous slag will be sold to brick manufacturers/ for road construction.

xi. Trace metals in waste material especially slag.

Unit is not going use any metal which contain trace metals like chromium, cobalt, copper, selenium, zinc etc. Hence no presence of trace metal in slag. Typical composition of slag is given in Table 2.12, page no. 2-29.

xii. Plan for trace metal recovery There is no presence of trace metal in



raw material, hence not applicable.

xiii. Trace metals in water There is no w/w generation from process and additionally no presence of trace metal in raw material, hence not applicable.

1.10 LIST OF INDUSTRIES SURROUNDING PROJECT SITE

List of industries within 10 km are shown below.

Name of Industry Activities

Inox Wind Ltd.

NH 8A, Rohika, Nr. Bagodra, Gujarat

Wind blades and tubular towers

manufacturer for wind power

Grainspan Nutrients Private Limited

Village: Bhamsara, Bavla-Bagodra

Food Products

Alpha Nippon Innovative Limited

Bhamasara, Ahmedabad, Bavla, Gujarat

Engineering Unit, Precision Metal

Fabrications, Material Handling &

Storage Systems

Kankaria Properties Pvt. Ltd.

Ahmedabad-Rajkot Highway, Bagodara

Brick Manufacturers

1.11 STRUCTURE OF REPORT

The overall contents of the EIA report is in line with generic structure of EIA report as

per the Appendix III of the EIA Notification, 2006. The report consists of twelve

chapters and the content is briefly described in this section.

Chapter 1: Introduction

This chapter covers purpose of the report, gives brief outline of the project and its

proponent, brief description of nature, size and location of the project & its

importance to country & region, scope of the study, TORs compliance etc.

Chapter 2: Project Description

This chapter includes project details and Infrastructure facilities including all

industrial & environmental aspects of the unit as well as manufacturing process

details. It also gives information about utilities, raw material, water & wastewater

quantitative details, stack details, hazardous waste generation, storage & disposal

facility.

Chapter 3: Description of the Environment

This chapter covers data of existing condition of Valued Environmental Components

like air, water, noise, soil, biological environment and socio-economic aspects, basic

amenities, land use pattern. It also gives details of study area, period of study,

component of environment & its methodology. Various sections of the chapter

discuss the existing land use and drainage pattern, climate and meteorological



parameters. Both primary and secondary data collected for the study are depicted in

this chapter.

Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

This chapter describes the overall impacts of the project activities on various

environmental components. It predicts the overall impact of the project activities on

different components of the environment viz. Air, Water, Land, Noise, Biological and

Socio-Economic and its mitigation measures.

Chapter 5: Analysis of Alternatives

This chapter gives details of analysis of alternatives in terms of technology & site.

Chapter 6: Environmental Monitoring Programme

This chapter describes technical aspects of monitoring (including measurement

methodologies, frequency, location and data analysis, reporting schedules, detailed

budget.

Chapter 7: Additional Studies

This chapter comprises of risk assessment, on-site, off-site emergency plan and

occupational health & safety programme, public consultation, social impact

assessment.

Chapter 8: Project Benefits

This chapter focuses on benefits of project on improvement in physical

infrastructure, social infrastructure & other tangible benefits.

Chapter 9: Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

Chapter 10: Environmental Management Plan

This chapter describes Environment Management Plan (EMP) to be adopted for

mitigation of anticipated adverse impacts if any and to ensure acceptable impacts.

Chapter 11: Summary & Conclusion

It gives brief of the EIA Report and chapters there in.

Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants engaged

This chapter describes the name of the consultant engaged with their brief nature of

consultancy activities.



Chapter-2

Project Description

2.1 INTRODUCTION

M/s. Genext Steels Private Limited is a Greenfield project, proposes establishment of

mini integrated steel plant with captive power plant. It comprises of Pellet plant

(Pellets – 800 TPD), DRI Kilns (Sponge Iron - 600 TPD), Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets –

1000 TPD), Rolling Mill (Structural Steel, TMT Bars & Rolled products – 975 TPD),

Power Generation–12 MW [7 MW through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB) and 5

MW through Fluidized bed Combustion (FBC) Boiler].

The estimated cost of the proposed project is around Rs. 261.0Crores. Out of this,

around Rs. 40.0 Crores will be invested for pollution control measures as capital cost

and Rs. 8.0Crores as recurring cost per annum.

Time of project completion will be about 2 years after accordance of the EC.

As per the EIA Notification, 2006, proposed activity is listed at S. No. 3(a) Metallurgical

Industries (ferrous & non-ferrous) under Category “A”. Based on the type of project,

following are the expected aspects:

Waste water generation,

Air Emissions,

Noise generation,

Solid/Hazardous waste generation, and

Occupational health, hazards & safety risk

2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT

The steel industry is considered to be an indicator of economic progress of the country

because of the critical role played by steel in infrastructural and overall economic

development.

The Indian steel industry have entered into a new development stage from 2005-2006,

after rising demand for steel in the country. Rapid rise in production has resultedin

India becoming the 4thlargest producer of steel. In the last 5 years, the production and

consumption of steel has grown at exceeding rates of 9% per annum. The pace of

growth has further accelerated in the current year to over 10%.

Today, the Indian steel industry contributes approximately 2% to the country’s GDP

and employs about 5 lakh people directly and about 20 lakh people indirectly.



The National Steel Policy has envisaged steel production to reach 180 million tonnes

by2020. Further, based on the status of MOUs signed by the private producers with the

various State Governments, it is expected that India’s steel capacity would be nearly

293 million tonne by 2020. This has given the opportunities for the production of Steel

in Private sector.The continued thrust on infrastructure & related activities and their

extension to rural India will provide a tremendous boost to the steel industry.

In the light of the above scenario, Genext Steels Pvt. Ltd. has proposed to setup an

integrated steel plant.

2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

The proposed project will be located at Survey Nos. 661,662,664,665,1822 & 1823,

Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, State: Gujarat.The coordinates of

center of industry are 22°37’35.22”N and 72°9’48.72”E.Location of the project, satellite

imageand boundary coordinates of the site are shown in Figure 2.1,Figure 2.2, and

Figure 2.3, respectively. Photographs showing location of proposed project site is

enclosed as Annexure-III.

Availability of Water

Total water requirement for the project would be about 1018 KLD. Out of which; 905

KLD will be fresh water requirement and 113 KLD recycle water from treated

wastewater/domestic water. The water requirement for the proposed project would be

met from Bore well (Ground water source) and recycle water from treated water.

Availability of Electricity

Total power requirement for the proposed project will be about 57 MW. This would be

met partly from Captive Power Generation units and partly from State Grid power

supply system. In-plant generation of power from Waste heat recoverywould be around

7 MWand 5 MW from Fluidized Bed Combustion (FBC) Boiler using Coal &Dolochar

generated during process and balance quantity will be imported coal. Balance 45MW

would be drawn from the Gujarat State Grid Power Supply system.

Transport Linkages State

National Highway-8A which is running through Ahmedabad-Rajkot is about 0.523 km

away from the proposed project site. State Highway, SH-8 between Bagodara to

Vataman is 4.4 km away from the proposed site. The nearest railway station is Arnej,

which is 12.0 km from the proposed project site. Other nearby railway station is Bavla,

about 30.45 km from the project site. The nearest airport is Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel

International Airport, Ahmedabad at about 67.0 km from the proposed project site.



Indicating Site Location

A preliminary plant general layout has been developed giving due consideration to the

land configuration and logistics of receipt and dispatch of materials. A sketch of site

location map is presented in Figure 2.1 below.

Figure 2.1Location of the project site



Figure 2.2 Satellite image

Figure 2.3 Image showing all boundary coordinates of the site



There are no Reserve Forests, National Parks, Wild life Sanctuaries within 10 Km radius

of the project site. Project site is 12.0 km away from the boundary of Nalsarovar Bird

Sanctuary, and 1.9 km away from the boundary of Eco-Sensitive Zone (ESZ) of

Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary. The proposed project site does not fall in the ESZ of

Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary. Site location with respect to both is shown in Figure 2.4.

Figure 2.4 Eco-Sensitive Zone Map of Nalsarovar Bird Sanctuary



2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION

2.4.1 Land Breakup & Project Site Layout

Proposed land area is 37.82Acre or 153061 m2. Greenbelt will be developed in around

50500m2area which tunes around 33% of the project area. The detailed proposed land

break up is given below inTable 2.1, whereas the plant layoutis given in the Figure 2.5.

Table 2.1: Land use planning

Sr. No.

Item Area (m2)

1. Built up area 32375

2. Internal roads 8997

3. Storage yard 20234

4. Greenbelt 50500

5. Parking area 20234

6. Open land 20721

Total 153061

Figure 2.5 Plant Layout



2.4.2 Project Magnitude

Proposed production capacity is given below:

Table 2.2: List of products with its capacity

Sr. No.


Production Capacity



3 Steel Melting Shop MS Billets Induction furnace: 4 x 25

MT/heat CCM: Eight-strand billet

caster

1000 TPD


products

2 x 500 TPD 975 TPD

5 Power Plant

A WHRB Electricity 1 x7MW 7 MW


Table 2.3: Plant facility

Sr.

No.

Unit Facility Capacity & nos. of

unit

1. Pellet Plant DiscPelletizer/Travelling

Grate

4 x 200 TPD

2. DRI Kilns Rotary Kiln 4 x 150 TPD

Kiln Cooler --

3. Steel Melting

Shop

Induction furnace 4 x 25 MT/heat

Continuous Casting Machine 8 Strands

4. Rolling Mill Continuous Rolling Mill 2 x 500 TPD

5. Power Plant WHRB 1 x 7 MW

FBC 1 x 5 MW

2.5 INPUT REQUIREMENTS

a) Raw material requirement:

The raw materials will be received through road transport in trucks and stored in

covered storage area. The raw materials will be stored/ inventory will be maintained as

per market requirement of the products and production schedule. Raw materials will

be stored on stable layer to avoid leaching of materials to ground water.

The raw material requirement with source and mode of transport are given in Table

2.4. Typical trace metal analysis of the raw material is given in Table 2.5.



Table 2.4 Raw material requirement

Sr. No.

Name of raw materials

Quantity (TPD)

Source Mode of Transport

Pellet Plant

1. Iron Ore fines/Iron Oxide (Mill Scale)

832 Rajasthan, Chhattisgarh,

Karnataka, Orissa and Mill scale from rolling

mill working in vicinity

By Truck (through covered

trucks)

2. Bentonite 48 Kutch (Gujarat) By Truck (through covered

trucks)

3. Imported Coal 128 South Africa from Kandla Port

(Gujarat)


trucks)

DRI Kiln

1. Pellets 800 Internal Through covered conveyors


(Gujarat)


trucks)

3. Dolomite 48 Local/Gujarat By Truck (through covered

trucks)

Induction Furnace with Concast

1. Sponge Iron 582 Internal Through covered conveyors

2. M S Scrap 562 Bhavnagar/Alang Imported


trucks)

3. Ferro Alloys 12.5 Local/Gujarat By Truck (through covered

trucks)

Rolling Mill

1. Billets 1000 Internal Through covered conveyors

For Power Plant [FBC boiler - Power generation 5 MW]

1. Dolochar 100 Internal Through covered conveyors



trucks)

Table 2.5

Typical compositions of main raw material (Iron-Ore/Iron Oxide)

Sr. No. Parameters Iron Ore result (%)

1. Iron as Fe 62-65

2. SiO2,Al2O3 2-5

3. LOI (Loss of Ignition) 2-3



b) Water requirement:

Total water requirement for the project would be about 1018 KLD. Out of which; 905

KLD will be fresh water requirement and 113 KLD recycle water from treated industrial

effluent/domestic water wastewater. This includes water requirement for Pellet Plant

(80 KLD), DRI (50 KLD), SMS (200 KLD), Rolling Mill (200 KLD), Power Plant(220 KLD),

Water treatment (80 KLD), greenbelt(150 KLD), water for ash & dust suppression (13

KLD)& Domestic (25 KLD). Water requirement of the project will be sourced from

Ground water. Water drawl permission from CGWA is under process, kindly refer

Annexure-II. Detailed break-up of water consumption and water balance diagram is

given in Table 2.6and Figure 2.6, respectively.

Table 2.6 Breakup of water consumption & w/w generation

Sr.

No

Water requirement for Water

Consumption

(KLD)

Wastewater

Generation

(KLD)

1 Domestic 25 20

2 Gardening 150 00

3 Industrial

a Water Treatment 80 80

b Pellet plant 80 0.0

c DRI kilns (Cooling) 50 0.0

d Steel Melting Shops (Cooling) 200 0.0

e Rolling Mills (Cooling & TMT) 200 0.0

f Power Plant (Cooling) 50 10

g Power Plant (Boiler) 170 20

h Ash & Dust suppression 13 0.0

Total Industrial 843 110

Total (I+II+III) 1018 130

Recycle water 113 -

Fresh Water Requirements 905 -



Figure 2.6: Water balance diagram

Total water requirement 1018 KLD

(Fresh – 905 KLD+ Recycle – 113 KLD)

Domestic

25

To STP

20*

Use in Greenbelt

Evaporation

Loss

40

Industrial

830 Greenbelt 20 + 130

Dust suppression 13

Softening plant

830

Power

plant 220

Reject 10 + 20 + 80= 110

80

Cooling

50

Boiler 170

Cooling

Tower for Process

560

10

20

Pellets 80

DRI 50

IF 120

CCM 200

TMT 80

Ev

ap

o R a

t i

on L

o s

s

Slag cooling

15

RO

95

Permeate

75**

MEE 20 Reject

20

Condensate 18**

Salt + Loss

0.5 + 1.5



c) Power:

Total power requirement for the proposed project will be 57 MW, this will be met

partly from the Captive Power Plant and partly from the State Grid i.e. Gujarat State

ElectricityCorporation Limited (GSECL).

Total captive power generation = 7 MW (WHRB) + 5 MW (FBC) = 12MW. Remaining

45MW will be procured from the State Grid.

d) Fuel:

Unit proposes to use imported Coal,Dolochar, HSDas fuel. Details of fuel consumption

are given in belowTable 2.7.

Table 2.7 Details fuel consumption

Sr. No. Type of fuel Fuel consumption

1. Imported Coal 728TPD

2. Dolochar 100 TPD

3. HSD 410 lit/hr.

e) Manpower:

The estimated direct manpower requirement for the proposed project will be around

500-700numbers; inclusive of staff and security. It will comprise of 20% of skilled

labours, 40% of semi-skilled labors and 40% of unskilled labours. About 1500 people

will get benefit under indirect employment. Apart from this, the proposed project will

encourage local service providers and ancillary industries.

2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION

It has been planned to complete the construction of all facilities within a total

timeframe of 24 months after obtaining statutory clearance.

2.7 TECHNOLOGY & PROCESS DESCRIPTION

The manufacturing technology inter-alia include manufacturing of pellets through

rotarykilns/travelling Grate; manufacturing of Sponge Iron through Rotary kilns;

manufacturing of MS Billets through Induction Furnace (IF) along with concast;

manufacturing of Structural Steel, TMT bars & Rolled products through continuous

Rolling Mill; power generation through WHRB & FBC Boiler. Above integrated plant

technology will be helpful to conserve around 30% of energy by way of direct hot

material/mass transfer from one process to another process. Waste Heatwill be utilized

for power generations which also reduce fuel cost around 25%. Manufacturing process

of all products is described below.



1. Pellet Plant

The process of pelletization enables converting Iron Ore Fines/Iron Oxide (Mill scale)

Ore into “Uniformed Sized Iron Ore Pellets” that can be charged for Production of Direct

Reduced Iron (DRI). Pellets are uniform size, with purity of 63%- 65% contributing to

faster reduction and high metallization rates. Pellets with their high, uniform

mechanical strength and high abrasive strength increase production of sponge iron by

25% to 30% with same amount of fuel.

Process Description

The iron ore pelletization unit comprises of following sections:

a) Drying & Preparation of Iron ore Fines

Generally Iron Ore Fines/Iron Oxide (Mill Scale), Bentonite available contain more than

6-7% moisture and require drying before grinding. The drying is carried out in Rotary

Drum Dryer. The moisture content in the dry material is controlled. The Iron Ore Fines

is fed in a screen for separation. Oversize/under size moves to the primary grinding

circuit.

b) Grinding

Iron Ore Fines, Bentonite are mixed in required proportion and fed into a Ball Mill. The

fineness of the product is controlled as may be necessary for particular ore and Pellet

quality.

c) Mixing and Blending

Iron Ore powder is blended with Bentonite and other binding materials in desired

proportion to get desired consistency. Small quantity of water is added during blending

operation. This raw mix is ready for Pellet making and stored in feed hopper.

d) Pelletization

Controlled quantity of raw mix is fed on disc Pelletizer. Some amount of water is

sprinkled for producing Pellets. These Pellets are passed through oversize and

undersize screens. Sized Pellets are then sent to sintering section.

e) Screening

Pellets produce in Pelletization sections are passed through oversize and undersize

screens. Rejects Pellets are sent back to raw mix silos and sized Pellets are fed into

Indurations Furnace.

f) Travel Grate Furnace

A Travel Grate Furnace is used for drying of Pellets. This is divided into 3 sections

(Drying – Preheating - Heating). Hot Pellets at around 950ºC to 1000ºC from this Travel

Grate are dropped into the Kiln for further strengthening/Induration.



g) Rotary Kiln

Rotary Kiln receives Pellets from the grate kiln where Pellets have to withstand a high

temperature approx. 1050ºC – 1200ºC. Here the Pellets gain more hardness due to high

temperature. Imported coal is used as a fuel inside the Kiln. After the Kiln, the Pellets

are passed to the Grate Cooler.

h) Cooler

Grate Cooler receives hot Pellet with temperature up to 1200ºC coming from Rotary

Kiln. Cooler has its own blowers to blast the air from bottom. The hot air from the first

zone is used as combustion air in kiln. The hot blast of the second zone is used in the

pre-heating zone-1 of travel grate and the air from the 3rdzone is discharged to the

atmosphere through chimney after passing through bag filter. Volume of cooling air in

all the three zones is regulated automatically through the temperature control loops as

per the requirement. Cold Pellets are discharged on conveyors and then conveyed to

the stock pile/loading hoppers.

i) Stacking

The screened Pellets of required size duly cooled at air cooler and subsequently natural

cooling are transported to Bunkers.

j) Recovery of Dust and Spillage

Spillage from drying zone and preheating zone of traveling grate, dust from the wind

box of traveling grate and dust collected through de-duster of technological process will

be sent to dust bin via belt conveyor, after they are ground together with iron ore

concentrate at grinding mill. Spillage (dry Pellets) produced at the discharge end of

traveling grate will be fed into the kiln from the feed chute of the kiln feed end by

bucket elevation. Almost all the dust &spillage are re-circulated and recovered.

Material Balance

Inputs Outputs Name Qty. (TPD) Name Qty. (TPD)

Iron Ore fines/Iron Oxide (Mill Scale)

832 Pellets 800

Bentonite 48 Gases 176 Imported Coal 128 Dust/Ash 32

Total 1008 Total 1008



Pelletization Process

2. DRI Kiln Based Sponge Iron Plant

The Direct Reduced Iron (DRI) plant will comprise of 4 x 150 TPD Kiln and related

accessories including Waste Heat Recovery power generating unit.

Process Description

The major plant facilities for the Sponge Iron plant are as follows:

• Day bins

• Rotary Kiln & Cooler

• Central Control Room

• Product processing and product storage

• Off gas system including waste heat recovery power generation



Process flow sheet of sponge iron plant

The day bin building will have bins for meeting raw material required for kiln. This bin

will have the storage facility for pellets, feed coal, dolomite etc.A refractory lined rotary

kiln will be used for reduction of Pellets in solid state. A central Burner located at the

discharge end will be used for initial heating of the kiln. Sized Pellets will

becontinuously fed into the kiln along with coal which has dual role of fuel as well as

reductant. Dolomite will be added to scavenge the Sulphur from the coal. A number of

air tubes will be provided along the length of the kiln. The desired temperature profile

will be maintained by controlling the volume of the combustion air through these tubes.

The carbon monoxide generated due to the combustion of coal, reduces the pellets and

converts it into sponge iron. The rotary kiln is primarily divided into two zones viz. the

pre heating zone and the reduction zone. The preheating zone extends over 30 to 50%



of the length of the kiln and in this the moisture in the charge will be driven off and the

volatile matter in the coal will be burnt with the combustion air supplied through the

air tubes. Heat from the combustion raises the temperature of the lining and the bed

surface. As the kiln rotates, the lining transfers the heat to the charge. Charge material,

pre-heated to about 1000oC enters the reduction zone. Temperature of the order of

1050oC will be maintained in the reduction zone, which is the appropriate temperature

for solid state reduction of iron oxide to metallic iron. This hot material will be

transferred to rotary cooler. In rotary cooler the material will cool from 1000oC to

100oC in cooler by spraying water. The cooler discharge material consists of sponge

iron lumps, sponge iron fines and dolochar. Magnetic and non-magnetic material will be

separated through magnetic separators and stored in separate bins.

Reaction/operation involved in process of sponge iron production C + O2 CO2

CO2 + C 2CO

3Fe2O3 + 2CO + O2 2Fe3O4 + 2CO2

CO2 + C 2CO

Fe3O4 +CO 3FeO + CO2

CO2 + C 2CO

FeO + CO Fe + CO2

Material Balance


Pellets 800 Sponge Iron 600 Imported Coal 570 Dolochar 100 Dolomite 48 Flue gases 718


3. Steel Melting Shop (SMS)

In Steel Melting Shop (SMS), Sponge Iron will be melted along with melting scrap and

fluxes to make pure liquid steel and then to mould it in required size billets. The SMS

will consist of following equipment and subassemblies: There will be 4 nos. of 25

T/heat Induction Furnaces in the SMS plant. MS Billets will be produced in Continuous

Casting Machine.



Induction Furnace with Concast (MS Billets)

Process Description

Material handling: Sponge Iron, M.S Scrap and ferro alloys are transferred from

material godown to furnace by close conveyor through feeder. Then it is charged into

Induction Furnace. Here movable suction hood will be provided to suck fugitive

emission if any. The major plant facilities are as follows:

a) Induction Furnace

Induction Furnaces is a device to melt the charge material using electrical power. It

consists of Crucible consisting of water cooled induction coils lined with refractory

material lined with water cooled induction coils, Electrical system to give controlled

power to induction coil, Hydraulic tilting system, cooling tower to cool the circulating

water, water softener for generating soft water, furnace transformer, Power Factor

improvement system and surge suppressor.



b) Ladles

Ladles are pots with refractory lining inside to withstand 17500C temperature. It has

side arms so that it can be lifted with the help of crane. Ladles are used to store the

liquid steel from Induction Furnace and take it for further processing. Ladles are with

bottom nozzle and pneumatically operated gate for discharge of liquid.

c) Cranes

Electric Over-head (EOT) cranes of various capacities are used to carry the

ladles/materials at different places. Cranes are used in Melting hall to charge melting

scrap, further place it over the Tundish of the Continuous Caster, to remove billets from

the cooling bed and store at designated places, and also for other petty use.

Slag Composition:

Sr. No. Parameters Result (%)

1. MnO 17.9

2. FeO 0.82

3. CaO 26.2

4. MgO 8.9

5. SiO2 25.8

6. Al2O3 10.9

d) Continuous Casting Machine (CCM)

8 stands CCM are used to continuously cast the liquid steel in required cross section

and in length of billets. It consists of Tundish, Mould, Bow with Withdrawal mechanism,

straightening mechanism and hydraulic system for withdrawal mechanism, water

pumps and cooling towers for water spray on the withdrawn section as well as on the

cooling bed. Dummy bar is provided to start the casting. Tundish is a rectangular vessel,

lined with refractory and having discharge nozzle with pneumatically operated gate. A

stand is erected over it where the ladle is stationed for discharging the liquid in it.

Mould is of copper with water cooled jacketed. Its cross-section in the bottom is of the

size of which billet is to be drawn. Initially the dummy for of the same size is kept

inserted. When the liquid steel is poured in the mould, the dummy bar is drawn slowly,

so that the liquid steel in partially skin frozen state comes out of the mould. Water

spray nozzles are installed to spray water over the just drawn billet to cool it further

and to harden the drawn billet in entirety.



Flow diagram of Continuous Casting Machine (CCM)

Material Balance


Sponge Iron 600 MS Billets 1000 M S Scrap 562 SMS Slag 90 Ferro Alloys 12.5 Flue Gases 84.5

Total 1174.5 Total 1174.5

4. ROLLING MILL

In the proposed project, 2 x 500 TPD capacity Rolling Mill will be installed for

producing 975 TPD of Bars, Rods and Structural Steel, Rolled Products. Facility for

direct charging of red hot billets from continuous casting to the rolling mill is envisaged.

Process Description

A cross country type continuousRolling Mill has been envisaged for the plant. The

stands have been grouped into roughing, intermediate and finishing groups. Roughing

group will have 4 (four) stands, intermediategroup will have 8 (eight) stands and

Hot Steel billets From

CCM

Continuous

Rolling Mill

Structural

steels TMT

bars

Rolled Products



finishing mill will have 8 (eight) stands. Roughing group of stands will be driven by one

motor. 4 nos. of intermediate stands will be driven by two motors and balance 4 nos.

will be driven by a separate motor. Each stand of finishing group will be driven by

single motor. Necessary guides and troughs will be provided at entry and exit of mill

stands.

Automated tilting, drop type tilter and feeding arrangement will be provided in

roughing group of stands. Repeaters have been provided in roughing/intermediate

stands as necessary.

Design provision has been made for introduction of slit rolling facility in future. The

rebars discharged from the mill will pass through a water cooling system comprising

cooling pipes with high pressure water nozzles for rapid water quenching. At the

cooling pipes the bar skin temperature will be reduced to about 600oC. The core of the

bar still remains hot. This entrapped heat tempers the bar. This thermo-mechanical

treatment of the bars increases tensile strength without adversely effecting weldability

and elongation properties. This process eliminates requirement of cold twisting of bars

for production of rebars.

A dividing shear, to cut the products to cooling bed length, will be located immediately

after the water cooling system. This shear will divide all products to cooling bed

lengths. Rake type cooling beds have been envisaged to receive the rolled product.

Cooling bed will be provided with incoming and outgoing roller tables. One cold shear

has been provided to cut the bars coming out of cooling bed into commercial length of 6

to 12 m. The rolled products will be formed into bundles and will be strapped by

strapping machine manually.

The finished products will be removed by overhead EOT crane and stored in the

storage area or dispatched through road vehicles.

Material Balance

Inputs Outputs

Name Qty. (TPD) Name Qty. (TPD)

MS Billets 1000 Rolled Products 975

Mill Scales 25


5. Power Plant

Unit proposed to install 7 MW WHRB & 5 MW FBC based power plant for captive use.



A. WHRB Power Plant:

Production of sponge iron in DRI kiln generates huge quantities of hot flue gases

carrying considerable sensible heat. The energy content of these gases can effectively

be used to generate electric power as well as steam for meeting various process

requirements. Thus a WHRB (Waste Heat Recovery Boiler) power plant would be an

ideally suited proposition to effectively make use of this waste gas. This WHRB Power

plant would not only make the plant independent of external source of electric power

to some extent and availability of steam for process purpose but would also result in

energy conservation and environment protection.

Steam Turbo-generators (STGs) envisaged for the Power plant will be single cylinder,

multistage, extraction – cum – condensing type complete with condenser, air

evacuation system, 2 x 100% condensate extraction pumps, electronic governing

system, lubricating oil system, regenerative feed heating system etc. The turbine will be

fed with steam generated from HRSG in DR kiln. The STGs will be located in the

machine hall of the power plant.

Flow Diagram of WHR based Turbo/Turbine Generator

B. FBC Power Plant

The unit will have one FBC boiler connected to 5 MW Steam Turbine Generator. The

boiler will be designed for continuous operation at Turbine Maximum Continuous

Waste Heat

Recovery Boiler

(WHRB)

Alternator 7 MW

Air Cooler

Condenser

Feed water pump

Turbine



Rating (TMCR). A margin of 10% over TMCR shall be taken into account to arrive at

boiler rated capacity. The boiler will be natural circulation, fluidized bed combustion,

two pass, non-reheat, single drum, balanced draft, semi- outdoor type. The boiler will

have continuous evaporation rating of approx. 360 tonnes/hr. (BMCR shall not be less

than 110% of TMCR) with steam parameters at super heater outlet as 98 kg/cm2 and

5400C (± 50C). The feed water temperature at MCR at inlet to economizer is expected to

be around 230 degree C. Steam parameter are to be fine-tuned at Boiler outlet based on

actual plant layout and piping arrangement. The boiler will be complete with ash/solid

separator, economizer, air pre-heater, ducting, FD fans, ID fans and PA fans. Air cooled

condensers envisaged for Power plant to conserve water.



Figure 2.7

Overall flow chart with material balance of raw materials and products

Table 2.8: Energy Balance

Sr. No.

Plant Power Consumption Power Requirement

(MW)

1 Pellet Plant 150 Kwh/ton 5.0

2 DRI Kiln 140 Kwh/ton 3.5

3 Induction Furnace based Steel Melting Shop

953Kwh/ton 40.0

4 Rolling Mill 143 Kwh/ton 6.0

5 Power plant WHRB Aux. Consumption @12% 1.5

FBC Aux. Consumption @20% 1.0

Total 57.0



2.8 UTILITIES AND AUXILIARY SERVICES

The under mentioned utilities and auxiliary services for all the production facilities are

proposed to be installed.

Water treatment system

Compressed air system

Air separation system

Fuel system

Firefighting Facilities

Ventilation and Air conditioning system

Laboratory facilities

Workshop facilities

2.9 GENERATION OF POLLUTANTS

The sources of generation of pollutants are given below;

2.9.1 Wastewater Generation

Total effluent generation from project (excluding sewage) will be 110 m3/day. There

will be no process wastewater generation from the Pellet, DRI, SMS & Rolling Mill

processes as closed-circuit cooling system will be provided. Only source of wastewater

generation will be Boiler blow down, cooling bleed off, &reject from DM plant

regeneration. Domestic wastewater generation will be 20 KLD. Water balance diagram

is given in Figure 2.6.

2.9.2 Gaseous Emission

Non-Point Fugitive Dust Emission Control:

The proposed project is planned to adopt adequate Air Pollution Control methods as

detailed below:

In the raw materials handling section comprising stockpiles, conveyor transportation,

sizing of materials etc., the fugitive dusts thus generated will be arrested by employing

covered conveyor, water sprinkling.

For work area cleaning, suction hood with adequate capacity connect with Bag filter of

adequate capacities and efficiencies will be installed. Thus, the fugitive dust emissions

from various non-point sources will be controlled by Dust Extraction (DE) systems

connect with Bag filter and water sprinkling.



Point Source emission:

Flue gas emission will be from stack attached with Pellet plant, stack of DRI Kiln,

Induction furnace, FBC boiler & WHRB boiler. Fuel consumption details are given in

below table.

Stacks:

Stack heights for all the facilities in the Steel Plant would range from 11 m to 75 m

depending on the emission volume and pollutants loading.

The details of the stacks and emission quality of stacks are given in Table 2.9 and

Table 2.10, respectively.

2.9.3 Stack height calculation for all plants

For pellet plant

Fuel : Imported coal

Fuel Consumption : 32 TPD

Sulphur content in coal : 0.5%

Sulphur Dioxide emission : 32 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 13.33 kg/hr.

Stack height (m) : 14 (Q)0.3

14 (13.33)0.3

14 x 2.175 = 30.45 m say 31.0 m proposed 31.0 m

DRI Kiln


Fuel Consumption : 142.5 TPD


Total Sulphur Dioxide emission (kg/hr.) : 142.5 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 59.375 kg/hr.


14 (59.375)0.3

14 x 3.40 = 47.6 m say 48.0 m, proposed 48.0 m

OR

Power Plant - WHRB




Total Sulphur Dioxide emission(kg/hr.) : 570 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 237.5 kg/hr.


14 (237.5)0.3



14 x 5.16 = 72.24 m say 75.0

If we start Power Plant – WHRB later on then separate stack of DRI Kiln is required hence

we have give two options

Power Plant - FBC




Total Sulphur Dioxide emission (kg/hr.): 30 x 1000 x 0.005 x 2/24

: 12.5 kg/hr.


14 (12.5)0.3

14 x 2.13 = 29.87 m say 30.0

Table 2.9 Details of stacks

Sr. No.

Stack attached to

Stack Height

(m)

Fuel Type Fuel consumption

rate

APCM Probable pollutants

Pellet Plant

1. Pellet PlantKiln-1

31.0 Imported Coal

32 TPD Bag filters PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm NOX <50 ppm 2. Pellet Plant

Kiln-2 31.0 32 TPD Bag filters

3. Pellet Plant Kiln-3

31.0 32 TPD Bag filters

4. Pellet Plant Kiln-4

31.0 32 TPD Bag filters

5. D G Set (300 kVA x 4 nos.) (Stand by)

11.0 each

HSD 120 lit/hr. each -- PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm NOX <50 ppm

DRI Plant

1. Rotary Kiln-1*

48.0 Imported Coal

142.5 TPD ESP PM <50 mg/NM3

SO2 <100 ppm NOX <50 ppm 2. Rotary Kiln-

2* 48.0 142.5 TPD ESP

3. Rotary Kiln-3*

48.0 142.5 TPD ESP

4. Rotary Kiln-4*

48.0 142.5 TPD ESP

*Above stack will be immediately install with APCM and after fully utilization of DRI kiln and start power generation from waste heat recovery, then we will discontinue above stacks.

OR

WHRB boiler (30 TPH)

75.0 Waste gas generated

from imported

coal in DRI kiln

570 TPD (Source Fuel)

ESP PM <30 mg/NM3



15.0 each



SMS Plant



1. Induction furnace-1

30.0 Electricity -- 4 sets of Fume

Extraction system with

bag filters

PM <50 mg/NM3


30.0 --


30.0 --


30.0 --


11.0 each



Power plant

1. FBC Boiler (25 TPH)

30.0 Imported Coal &

DoloChar

30 TPD &

100 TPD

ESP PM <30 mg/NM3


DRI Plant -process area cleaning vents

1. Vent of process area cleaning for Rotary Kiln-1 5 Nos.

11.0 each

-- -- Dust Extraction

system with bag filters

PM <45 mg/NM3


11.0 each



PM <45 mg/NM3


11.0 each



PM <45 mg/NM3


11.0 each



PM <45 mg/NM3

Table 2.10 Estimated air emission Quality

Sr.

No.

Stack attached to Stack

Height

(m)

Temp.

(0C)

Velocity

(m/s)

Dia.

(m)

Concentration

(mg/Nm3)

SPM SO2 NOx

1 Pellet Plant, Kiln-1 31.0 100 5.5 1.00 30 35 30

2 Pellet Plant, Kiln-2 31.0 100 5.5 1.00 30 35 30 3 Pellet Plant, Kiln-3 31.0 100 5.5 1.00 30 35 30 4 Pellet Plant, Kiln-4 31.0 100 5.5 1.00 30 35 30 5 D G Set (300 kVA x 4 nos.)

(Stand by)

11

each

180 15.0 0.30 55 25 35

6 Rotary Kiln-1 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30 7 Rotary Kiln-2 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30 8 Rotary Kiln-3 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30 9 Rotary Kiln-4 48.0 150 5.0 1.80 30 35 30

10 D G Set (750 kVA x 4 nos.)

(Stand by)

15

each

180 15.0 0.375 55 25 35

11 Induction furnace-1 30.0 100 5.5 1.00 35 -- --






15 D G Set (300 kVA x 4 nos.)

(Stand by)

11.0

each

180 15.0 0.375 55 25 35

16 WHRB boiler 75.0 150 7.5 2.00 25 45 40

17 FBC Boiler 30.0 150 7.5 1.20 30 45 40

18 Vent of process area cleaning for Rotary Kiln-1, 5 Nos.

11.0 each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --


11.0 each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --


11.0 each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --


11.0 each

100 5.0 0.450 35 -- --

2.9.4 Hazardous and Solid waste generation

Hazardous waste generation:

Main sources of hazardous waste generation will be ETP sludge (5 MT/month), MEE

salt (13 MT/month), used lubricating oil (5.0 Kl/year), discarded drums/containers

(500 nos./month). Details are summarized in below table.

Solid waste generation:

The solid wastes generation from proposed steel plant and its utilization is summarized

inbelow Table.

Table 2.11: Details of Hazardous & Solid waste

Sr. No.

Type of Waste

Category of Waste

Quantity Disposal facility

Hazardous waste

1. ETP Sludge & MEE salt

35.3 5.0 MT/month

13 MT/month

Collection, Storage, Transportation & disposed at TSDF site.

2. Used Lubricating oil

5.1 5.0 Kl/year

Collection, Storage, Transportation and sale to Registered re-processors

3. Discarded Drums &containers

33.1 500 Nos./month

Collection, Storage, Transportation, decontamination and sale to registered recyclers

Solid waste

Pellet Plant:

1. Ash -- 32 TPD Collection, Storage andsold to brick manufacturing units.

Sponge Iron Plant

1. Ash -- 36 TPD Collection, Storage and sold to Cement Plants & Brick manufacturers.

2. Dolochar -- 100 TPD Collection, Storage andused in FBC power plant/brick manufacturing units.

Induction Furnace

1. Slag -- 90 TPD Slag from SMS will be crushed and iron will be recovered & then remaining non–magnetic



material will be sold to brick manufacturers/for road construction.

Rolling Mill

1. Mill Scale -- 25 TPD Will be reused in the Pellet Plant

Power Plant

1. Ash from power plant

-- 1.5 TPD Ash will be sold to Cement Plants/ Bricks manufacturers

Composition of slag

The slag does not contain any toxic chemicals. Composition slag isgiven below.

Table 2.12Range of chemical compositions in slag

Sr. No. Parameters Chemical composition (%)

1. FeO 12-15

2. SiO2 + Al2O3 85-90

2.9.5 Noise generation

Main source of noise generation will be operation of pumps, compressors, exhausters,

turbines, boiler, blowers, compressors, mill machineries etc. Intermittent noise would

arise from the steam ejection and impacts due to metal to metal contact, during

handling of scraps and finished metal products.

2.10 POLLUTION CONTROL STRATEGY

The unit is equally conscious about the pollution control strategy. The details of

pollution control strategy for various parameters are given here under,

2.10.1 Effluent Management

There will be no wastewater generation from the Pellet, DRI, SMS & Rolling Mill

processes, as closed-circuit recirculation cooling system will be provided.

Only source of wastewater generation will be cooling tower bleed off, boiler

blow down & DM plant regeneration and sewage.

Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after ensuring compliance

with SPCB norms, partly utilized for slag cooling & partly sent to RO followed by

MEE.

Sewage will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and treated water will

be utilized for Greenbelt development.

EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (POWER PLANT)

pH of the boiler blow down will be between 9.5 to 10.5. Hence a neutralization tank will

be constructed for neutralizing the effluent of boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration

water. After neutralization, these two effluent streams will be mixed with Cooling

Tower bleed off in a Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). Then, part of the effluent will be



directly reused for slag cooling (15 KLD) and part of it (95 KLD) will be passed through

RO. RO eject will be taken to Multi Effect Evaporator (MEE). RO permeate (75 KLD)and

Condensate of MEE (18 KLD) will be reused in utility. No effluent will be let out of the

plant premises. Hence, unit will achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD).Sewage will be

treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and treated water will be utilized for

Greenbelt development. Effluent characteristics are given below:

Table 2.13: Characteristics of effluent

Sr. No.

Parameters Unit Result

Untreated Treated

1 pH -- 9.5-10.5 6.5-7.5

2 TSS mg/L 150-200 50-70

3 TDS mg/L 5000-6000 5000-6000

4 Copper mg/L <0.01 <0.01

5 Iron mg/L <0.01 <0.01

6 Zinc mg/L <0.01 <0.01

ETP Flow diagram

Table 2.14 Details of ETP units

Sr. No. Unit Dimension Capacity (m3)

1 Collection Tank 5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5 (4.0 WD)

110.25

2 Neutralization tank 2.5 x 2.5 x 3.5 (3.0 WD)

18.75

3 Settling tank 8 x 4 x 2.5 (1.5 SD)

Surface area 32 m2

4 Treated effluent sump/basin

5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5 (4.0 WD)

110.25

Neutralization

Tank

Boiler Blow down

DM plant regeneration

CMB Cooling

Tower bleed

off

Part of the treated

water used for slag cooling

RO

MEE

Permeate utilize for utility

Condensate reuse in utility

Collection

Tank

Settling Tank

Sludge to

SDB



5 Sludge Drying bed 10 x 5 x 1.5 Surface area 50 m2

6 RO 2 set 5 m3/hr. each

7 MEE 1 1 m3/hr.

2.10.2 Air Pollution Control Measures

Air Pollution Control (APC) Measures

Dust emissions would take place due to combustion of fuel from various furnaces and

kilns. The dust laden waste flue gases would be cleaned either by ESP or Bag Filters.

Dolo dusts of the respective kiln combustion flues would be arrested in Bag filters.

There would also be dust emission from Dust Extraction (DE) stacks, which would be

controlled by Bag Filter.

The flue gases from the Pellet plant will be controlled by high efficiencyBag filter and

then discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 31 m height.

Flue gases from Rotary kiln of DRI plant will be passed through Electro Static

Precipitators (ESPs) and then discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 48.0 m

height.

Flue gases from DRI kiln will pass through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler and after heat

recovery; the gases will be treated in high efficiency ESPs to bring down the particulate

emissionin the exhaust gases to below 30 mg/Nm3 and then discharged into the

atmosphere through stack of 75m height.

The Fugitive emissions from the Induction furnaces will be sucked through hoods and

will passthrough a fume extraction system with bag filters and then the treated gases

will be dischargedinto the atmosphere through 4 nos. of stacks each of 30.0 m height

for effective dispersion ofemissions from Induction Furnaces. The outlet dust emission

in the exhaust gases will be lessthan 50 mg/Nm3.

The flue gases from the FBC boiler will be treated in a high efficiency ESPto bring down

the particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and will be discharged through astack

of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of emissions into the atmosphere.

Furthermore, facility for sampling such as ladder, platform and sampling point will be

provided as per the GPCB guidelines. The details of stacks with their APC measures &

height are given in Table 2.9.

2.10.3 Fugitive Emission Control

To control the fugitive emissions generated during various operations inthe industry, unit

will adopt following mitigation measures.

Raw material will be stored in the covered structure



Unit will provide dust suction system to control fugitive emission generated from

melting of scrap.

Unit will provide dust suppression system (water sprinklers) in coal unloading

area and other bulk material handling areas.

Coal conveying will be done by using covered coal conveyers to prevent flying of

dust during conveying.

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only.

All the internal roads will be paved/concreted

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive emission.

Frequent work area monitoring will be done ensure fugitive emissions level.

2.10.4 Hazardous & Solid Waste Management

Entire quantity of hazardous waste will be handled & disposed as per Hazardous &

Other waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. ETP sludge &

MEE salt will be disposed to approve TSDF site for landfilling. Used oilwill be sold to

registered re-processors. Discarded Drums/containerswill be sold to registered

recyclers. The unit will provide isolated area with impervious flooring & roof cover for

the storage of hazardous waste.

Ash will be sold to brick manufacturing units. Dolochar will be used in FBC power plant

as fuel/ sold to brickmanufacturing units. Slag after crushing and iron removal, will be

used in road construction/brick manufacturing units. Mill scale will be reused in the

Pellet Plant.

Details of solid and hazardous waste disposal methods are given in Table 2.11.

2.10.5 Noise Pollution Control Measures

During the operation phase of the project, the major noise generating sources in the

plant will be turbine, boiler, feed pumps, steam blowing from boiler, operation of

furnace, material handling used and vehicular movement. All machinery will be

manufactured as per MoEF/OSHA & other internationalstandards on noise levels.In

order to mitigate the continuous noise within the working area, measures like selection

of low noise prone rotary equipment and vibration dampening would be one of the

plant design aspects. Acoustic enclosure is provided to Turbines. In addition, noisy

equipment would be housed separately. Operational people would run those noise

prone machines from the sound proof control room/cabins. Steam ejectors would be

provided with silencers. Thick greenbelt will be developed around the periphery of the

plant. With all these mitigation measures, it is planned to have work zone noise level of



Leq for continuous 8 hours duration within 85 dB (A), if measured at 3 m distance from

the noise emitting source. Ear muff, ear plug will be provided to all workers working at

noisy area.

2.11 RAIN WATER HARVESTING

Unit proposed to collect all the rain water falling on the terrace through the rain water

down takes which shall be grouped and taken into a rain water harvesting tank with

bypass arrangement for first wash rinse as well as to bypass into the storm water drain.

All drainage system will be concreted lined and located along the roads up to rain water

harvesting pit. Roof top rain water will be collected in tanks and reused after filtration

as per requirements.Detailed calculation of rain water harvesting is given in Annexure-

VI.

2.12 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

Total land area of the project is 153061.0 m2. The unitwill develop greenbelt in area of

50500m2, which will be 33% of the total area of the project. Thick greenbelt all along

the roads and plant periphery will be developed.

2.13 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY

The company is concerned with the health, safety and environment protection. The

company will formulate and develop an ‘Occupational Health & Safety Policy’ to ensure

good health and safety of its employees. Following key safety measures shall be a part

of the Health & Safety policy of the company and shall be followed after the project

implementation:

Safety Training shall be provided to the employees.

Safety Sirens with Alarm System in case of emergency shall be provided.

Fire Hydrant System shall be installed.

Fire Extinguishers shall be provided.

Mock drills shall be periodically conducted and factors like response time shall be

evaluated.

First Aid Facility and training shall be provided.

Personnel protective Equipment shall be provided to the employees.

Health check-ups shall be organized at regular intervals.

Safety/Health records shall be maintained.



Table:2.15

Technical specification of Induction Furnace

Particular Specification

Capacity 25 Tons per Heat

Alloys to be melted Mild Steel

Melt Temperature 1600°C

Main Panel Static frequency Converter

Furnace Transformer 13 MVA

Rated Converter Capacity 750 x 4

Maximum Inverter Capacity 5000V

Nominal Furnace Frequency 500 Hz

Line Power Factor 0.999

KVA required at Input 10000

Melt rate at 10000 KW 25 kg per KW

Power connection Dy/11

Style of Furnace Induction

Pouring Mechanism Hydraulic Tilting

Furnace lining Acidic

Interlock system Provided

Table:2.16

Technical specification of ESP

Sr.

No.

Parameters Unit Value

1 Nos. of ESP 6 --

2 Gas flow rate per kiln m3/hr. 70000

3 Flue gas temperature 0C 200

4 Inlet dust concentration mg/Nm3 21000

5 Outlet dust concentration mg/Nm3 <30

6 Design Pressure 800

7 Number of fields -- 3

8 Pressure drop across the ESP MMWC 25

9 Collection efficiency % 99.9



Table: 2.17

Typical Technical specification of Bag filter

Sr.

No.

Particulars Unit Specification

1 Application - Pellet/DRI plant/SMS

2 Fuel - Imported Coal

3 Bulk density of Ash Kg/m3 540

4 Operation - Pulse Jet

5 Operating Temp. Deg C 100 to 150

6 Equipment - ASA (as specified above)

7 Capacity m3/hr. 50,000

8 Air to cloth ratio m3/min/m2 1.54

9 Inlet gas temperature Deg. C 150

10 Inlet dust loading gm/m3 2

11 Outlet dust emission mg/Nm3 50

12 Pressure drop across the Bag

Filter (flange to flange) – max

Mm wg 50

13 Casing design pressure MMWC 600

14 Casing design temperature Deg. C. 250

15 Bag specifications

a Material - Polyester

b Bag Fitting - Vertical

c Sp. Weight g/m2 750

d Thickness mm 1.8

e Bag Size mm 3010

f No. of bags Nos. 250 in each module

g Filter Area per bag m2 1.187

h Total filtering area m2 297



Chapter-3

Description of Environment

3.1 GENERAL

To assess environmental impacts from proposed project at a specific location, it is

essential to monitor the existing environmental quality prevailing in the surrounding

area prior to implementation of the project. The environmental status within the

impact zone could be used for identification of significant environmental issues to be

addressed in the impact assessment study. Baseline data generation forms a part of the

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study and helps to evaluate the predicted

impacts on the various environmental attributes in the study area by using scientifically

developed and widely accepted impact assessment methodologies.This section contains

the description of baseline studies of 10 km radius surrounding the project site. The

baseline study was carried out to understand following environmental parameters.

Land Environment

Meteorology

Air Environment

Water Environment

Soil Environment

Noise Environment

Biological Environment

Socio-economic Environment

The data collected has been used to understand the existing environment scenario

around the project site against which the potential impacts of the proposed project can

be assessed.

3.2 STUDY AREA

The project site is located at Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 & 1823, Village:

Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, Gujarat. An area of 10 km radius from the

boundary of the project site is considered as study area for the EIA study as per the TOR

issued by MoEF&CC.



Table 3.1 Environmental setting of the study area

Features Details

Location Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla,

Dist: Ahmedabad

Coordinates of centre of

project site

Latitude: 22°37’35.22”N

Longitude: 72° 9’48.72”E


Topography Plain


Nearest






Air Port SardarVallabhbhai International Airport, Ahmedabad, about 67.0 km towards NE direction


Reserve Forests/National

Park/Wildlife Sanctuary



Historical/Archaeological

place

None within 10 km radius, Lothal is at distance of 15.0 km towards SE direction

Note: Aerial distances are mentioned in above table

3.3 STUDY PERIOD

Baseline environmental quality represents the background scenario of various

environmental components. As part of EIA study, baseline environmental monitoring

was done over a radial distance of 10 km from the project boundary during the period

of January, 2018 to March, 2018.

3.4 SOURCE OF ENVIRONMENTAL DATA GENERATION

Baseline information on micrometeorology, ambient air quality, water quality, noise

level, soil quality and ecology (flora-fauna) are generated by M/s. San EnvirotechPvt.

Ltd., Ahmedabad. Apart from these, secondary data have been collected from census

book, revenue records, soil survey and forest department, meteorological department

etc. The generation of primary as well as collection of secondary data &information

from the site and surrounding was carried out during the period of January, 2018 to

March, 2018.



3.5 METHODOLOGY

The process & methodology adopted for various environmental attributes in the study

is as follows:

To assess the Air environment in the study area, monitoring of the Air quality was

done by setting up reconnaissance. The samples were collected by installation of

combinedsamplers (with gaseous attachment) at different locations for monitoring

of primary air pollutants to work out the existing status of air quality.

Ground water samples& surface water samples were analysed for the parameters

necessary to determine water quality (based on IS: 10500-2012 criteria) and those

which are relevant from the point of view of environmental status of the project site.

Soil samples were collected using an Auger and analysed for relevant physico-

chemical characteristics in order to assess the future impact on soil of the project.

The noise level monitoring was done at various locations at different intervals of

time with the help of sound level meter at industrial, commercial, residential &

sensitive locations.

Socio-economic data was collected from field studies and secondary sources like

Census of India 2011, Revenue record, etc.

3.6 LAND ENVIRONMENT

Land cover is the physical material at the surface of the earth (includes grass, trees,

bare ground, water etc.); whereas Land use is the human use of land. Studies on land

use aspects of eco-system play an important role in identifying susceptible issues and to

take appropriate action to uphold ecological equilibrium in the region. Main objective is

to provide a baseline status of the study area so that temporal changes due to the

proposed activities on the surroundings can be assessed in future.

3.6.1 Land use pattern of the Study Area

The study area of 10-km around the project site is considered in the land use pattern

study. The term land-use indicates the way in which the land is utilized for different

purposes. The land-use distribution of the study area is given in Table 3.2.Land-use

map is given in Figure 3.1.

3.6.2 Objective of Land Use Studies

The objectives of land use studies are (i) to develop land use & land cover map using

land coordinates of the project area, (ii) to identify and mark important basic features

according to primary and secondary data, and (iii) to suggest measures for

conservation and sustainable use of land.



Figure 3.1 Land use Map



Table 3.2 Land use statistics work out based on satellite imaginary

Level 1 Level 2 Area (Sq. km.) Area (%)

Agricultural -- 247.746 78.9

Built-up land Settlements 9.106 2.9

Industrial area 5.966 1.9

Waste land Land with scrub 16.956 5.4

Land without scrub 25.748 8.2

Water body Tank/ River/Major Canal etc. 8.478 2.7

Total 314 100

3.6.3 Topography

The site area is plain with little undulating at few places. Agriculture and allied

activities are most predominant in this area. Fallow land and barren lands were less

observed near project site. There was no Eco Fragile Zone or Natural Forest near

project site in study area.Toposheet of location with site location map of 10 km radius

at1:50,000 scale is shown in Figure 3.12.

3.6.4 Seismicity of the area

The project site falls under seismic zone III. The Seismic Zone Map of Gujarat is given

below.

3.7 METEOROLOGY

Meteorology is the key to understand the air quality. Wind fluctuations over a very

wide range of time, accomplish dispersion and strongly influence other processes

associated with them. The micrometeorological conditions at the project site will be

regulating the transport and diffusion of air pollutants released into the atmosphere.



3.7.1 Site specific micro-meteorological data

The data on surface meteorological parameters in the study area were collected from

January, 2018 to March, 2018, by setting up portable weather monitoring station

placed at project site. The sensor of the equipment was kept at sufficient height (about

10 m) from ground level with free exposure to the atmosphere. The monitoring

methodology is given in Table 3.3&data collected are presented in Table 3.4.

The following parameters were recorded at hourly intervals during monitoring period:

• Wind speed & Wind direction

• Temperature

• Relative humidity

• Rainfall

Table 3.3: Monitoring Methodology of Meteorological Data

Sr. No.

Sampling Parameters

Sample Collection Total Sampling

Period

Sampling Frequency

Methodology

Sampling Equipment

Sensitivity/ Detection

Limit

1 Wind Speed Anemometer cup counter (0 to 65 m/s)

0.25 m/s January 2018 to March 2018

Hourly As per manufacturer’s manual, Instruments are Calibrated

2 Wind Direction

Wind vane (0° to 359°)

10

3 Temperature Thermometer (-40° to 60°)

0.10C

4 Humidity Hygrometer 3%

5 Rainfall Rain gauge 0.5 mm

6 Cloud Cover -- -- 4 Hourly Visual Inspection by the observer

Table 3.4: Meteorological Data for the Monitoring Period

(January, 2018 to March,2018)

Month Wind speed (km/hr.)

Pre dominant wind

direction

Temp. (0C) Relative Humidity

(%)

Rain fall (mm)

Max Min Max Min Max Min 24 hrs. highest

No. of rainy days

Jan,18 22 0 E & ENE 32 16 67 12 No rainfall during the

study period Feb,18 23 0 ENE & NNE 39 19 54 11

March,18 31 0 N & NE 42 24 60 06

3.7.2 Wind Rose

Wind rose is the diagrammatic representation of wind speed in a specified direction

with its arms representing sixteen directions, each arms give a clear frequency

distribution of wind speed in a particular direction for a given period of time. It is one of

the most important meteorological parameters and governs dispersion, diffusion &

transportation of pollutants.The % frequencies of wind in 16 directions have been



computed from the recorded data during the study period for 24-hourly intervals to

plot wind rose. The predominant wind directions –ENE,NE, N & NNE; implying that

winds come from these directions for most of the time during the period. The wind

speed class 1-5 kmph occurred for 3.06%, 6-10 kmph about28.5%, 11-15 kmph40.8%

and above 15 kmph and below 40 kmph occurred for 18.76% of the study period. Calm

wind during this period is 8.80%. Wind rose diagram is shown as Figure 3.8.

3.8 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

3.8.1 Introduction

To quantify the impact of the proposed project on the ambient air quality, it is

necessary to evaluate the existing ambient air quality of the area. The ambient air

quality monitoring with respect to the study area of 10 km radius around the project

site was done for the baseline information.

3.8.2 Design Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically

designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The design of monitoring network is

based on the following considerations:

Topography/Terrain of the study area

Populated areas within the region

Prediction of maximum concentrations and distances of their likely occurrence

under prevailing meteorological conditions

Representation of regional background

Representatives of likely impact areas

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were placed at eight locations with

due consideration to the above mentioned points.

3.8.3 Reconnaissance

Reconnaissance was undertaken to establish the baseline status of air environment in

the study region. The prime objective of the AAQ survey, within 10 km radial study area

around the proposed project, was to establish the existing ambient air quality levels.

The monitoring locations (relative directions and distances) are given in Table

3.11&shown in Figure 3.7and results are given in Table 3.12 to 3.17.

3.8.4 Parameters, Frequency and monitoring Methodology

The existing ambient air quality, in terms of Particulate Matter-10 (PM10), Particulate

Matter-2.5 (PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Carbon Monoxide

(CO), Hydrocarbons (HC), Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) has been measured. It



was ensured that, the equipment was placed at open space free from any obstacles at a

height of at least 3 to 4 m above the ground level at each monitoring station to avoid the

effects of wind-blown ground dust. Monitoring has been carried out as per the latest

CPCB and MoEF&CC guidelines and notifications. Details of methodology are given in

Table 3.5.

Table 3.5Methodology of Ambient Air Monitoring

Sampling Parameters

Instrument used Analytical equipment

Detection Limit

Test method

PM10 Combined Sampler GTI-241

Electronic Balance 1 μg/m3 Gravimetric IS: 5182 (Part 23) 2006

PM2.5 Combined Sampler GTI-241

Electronic Balance 1 μg/m3 Gravimetric CPCB Guidelines for Ambient Air Monitoring

SO2 Gaseous flow attachment with combined sampler

Spectro Photometer 2.5 μg/m3

Colorimetric IS: 5182: (Part II) 2001

NOx Gaseous flow attachment with combined sampler

Spectro Photometer 6.0 μg/m3

Colorimetric IS: 5182: (Part VI) 2006

CO Bladder & Pump

Gas Chromatograph 1 ppm Gas Chromatography

HC Bladder & Pump Gas

Chromatograph

1 ppm Gas

Chromatography

VOC Bladder & Pump Gas

Chromatograph

1 ppm Gas

Chromatography

The duration of sampling of PM2.5, PM10, SO2&NOx was 24-hourly continuous sampling

and CO, HC (Methane & non-Methane), VOCs (Benzene, Toluene & Xylene)were

sampled for 8-hours duration. The monitoring was done for twice a week for three

months. Parameters and frequency of sampling is giveninTable 3.6.

Table 3.6 Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling

Parameters Sampling frequency

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Particulate Matter (PM10) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 hourly sampling

Hydro Carbon (HC) 8 hourly sampling

Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) 8 hourly sampling

3.8.5 Interpretation of result

The existing baseline levels with respect to PM10, PM2.5, SO2,NOX,CO, HC, and VOCsare

tabulated in Tables 3.13 to 3.17& chart is given as Figures 3.3 to 3.6.



Particulate Matter (PM10)

An averageand 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM10 values at all the locations are

found from 59.7 – 73.4 g/m3 and 63.4 – 77.1g/m3. The results were found well within

the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS-CPCB) of 100 g/m3.

Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM2.5 values at all the locations ranges

from 32.6– 41.3g/m3 and 37.0–45.2g/m3. The values are well within National Ambient

Air Quality Standards (NAAQS-CPCB) of 60 g/m3.

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly SO2 value of arithmetic mean at all

the locations ranged from 10.9 – 15.8g/m3 and 12 – 17.8g/m3 respectively, which are

well below National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS-CPCB) of 80 g/m3.

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24 hourly NOx value of arithmetic mean at all

the locations ranged from 13.6-19.6g/m3 and 15.1-24.2g/m3 respectively, which are

well below the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS-CPCB) of 80 g/m3.

3.9 Geology & Hydrogeology of study area

3.9.1 Geology

The area forms part of North Gujarat Alluvial Plain with elevations ranging from 40 to

55 m above MSL. The area is under laid by post Miocene alluvium comprising sand,

gravel, silt and clay. The alluvium is about 400 m thick under laid by tertiary formation.

The alluvium mainly consists of palaeo deltaic, fluvial and Aeolian sediments,

comprising alternate bands of fine to course grained sand, gravel and yellowish

brownish sticky clay. The sub soil condition below the existing ground level is almost

uniform in nature. Sub soil is composed of Clay mixed with little fine grained silty sand,

moram and Kankar with low resistivity due to clay and soil moisture. The area is

covered with recent to sub recent alluvial deposits comprising of brownish clay mixed

with little fine grained sand, silty sand. The Soil below ground level consists of top silty

low plastic soil layer having no swelling nature. Blackish brown to yellowish brown

clayey silt or sand silt layer extends to the depth of 5 to 7mts.

3.9.2 Hydrogeology

The district forms a part of the Cambay Basin. The stratigraphic succession of the

formations encountered within the drilled depth of the wells in the district along with



its thickness and generalised lithology are presented here. The litho logical logs of

exploratory bore holes, electrical logging results by govt. agencies in and around

Bavlataluka have been studied to understand the subsurface geology and the aquifer

system. These bore holes have penetrated the thick sequence of post Miocene

sediments down to +300 m depth. The hydro geological cross sections have been

prepared by CGWB to study the subsurface geology and aquifer system in the area. It

reveals the existence of multi-layered aquifer system, within a depth of +300 m bgl.

Ground water in the fissured formations (Hard rocks)

The Deccan trap and the limestone formations occupying the western part of the

Dandhukataluka form the only hard rock aquifers in the district. It occupies the south

western extremity of the district and can be termed as fissured formation. Occurrence

and movement of ground water is governed by the extent and thickness of weathered

zone, presence and interconnections of joint and fracture systems, which provides

secondary porosity. The thickness of the weathered zone of the basalt ranges from less

than 1 meter to more than 6 m and the joints and fracture system is prevalent down to

a maximum depth of 80 to 90 mbgl in the basaltic terrain. The occurrence of vesicles

and amygdales in the flows of the trap rocks and solution cavities in the limestone

formations and the geological contact between limestone and basalt are other factors

favourable for ground water storage and movement. Ground water occurs in the

weathered and fissured zones mainly under water table conditions. It occasionally

occurs under semi-confined conditions in the event of comparatively deeper fracture

system in these formations. These fissured formations do not form good repository of

groundwater, compared to porous unconsolidated sedimentary formations.

Groundwater is being developed in these formations by means of dug and dug-cum-

bored wells. Depth of dugwells ranges between 5 and 38.5 mbgl whereas depth of dug-

cum-bored wells varies between 15 and 78 mbgl in the case of fissured basaltic

formations.

Ground water in Porous Formations (Sedimentary)

It occupies the major part (93.5%) of the district. It includes the post-Miocene alluvial

deposits at the top underlined by older Miocene formations. The sedimentary

formations mainly consist of fine to coarse-grained sand, gravel, silt, clay, clay stone,

siltstone and kankar. The thickness of the post-Miocene alluvial formations exceeds

419m near Dholka at Rampur Ground water occurs under phreatic as well as confined

conditions in the granular horizons with in the sedimentary.



Unconfined aquifer

The unconfined aquifer occurs in the upper horizons down to a maximum depth of 60-

75 mbg consisting of medium to fine grained sand, silt with local lenses of sandy clay

and clay. Medium to fine grained sands are found in the north-eastern part of the

district. In this area where only phreatic aquifer is present, base of the alluvium is

marked by gravel. Fine grained sands with silt are found further south and south-west

at Dholka and Sanandtaluka. The thickness of aquifer varies between 20 and 45 m in

general, met within the depth range of 3 and 75 mbgl and can be considered as

unconfinedaquifer. It is being developed by dug, dug-cum-bored wells and tube wells.

Depth of dug wells ranges between 5 and 38.5 mbgl whereas depth of dug-cum-bored

wells varies between 15 and 78 mbgl in the case of fissured basaltic formations.

Confined aquifers

Deep bore well tapping confined aquifers are the main ground water withdrawal

structure. Due to rapid urban growth, heavy ground water exploitation has resulted in

progressive lowering of potential head and discharges. Depths of bore well have

increased from about 150 m in late sixties to more than 300 m at present. Depth to

water level in confined aquifers ranged from 90 to 100mts.

Water level Fluctuation

Large scale development of Ground Water from deep aquifers has resulted in

progressive decline in water levels. Presently the Pumping water level rest more than

75m bgl and as a consequence discharge have reduced or pumping costs have

increased. The rate of decline varies from 2.06 m/yr to 2.136 m/yr.

3.10 WATER QUALITY

3.10.1 Introduction

Water quality assessment is one of the essential components of EIA study. Such

assessment helps in evaluating the existing health of water body and suggesting

appropriate mitigation measures to minimize the potential impact from development

projects. The water quality at the site and other locations within the 10-km impact zone

was monitored during the study period.The purpose of the study is to:

Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;

Evaluate the impact on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions recreational

resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and

Predict the likely impacts on water quality due to the project and related

activities.



Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized based

on:

Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact

areas; and

Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.

3.10.2 Sampling Frequency, Techniques & Methodology

Six surface water and eight groundwater samples were collected during the study

period. Ground water samples were collected from the existing bore wells, while

surface water was collected from ponds by surface water sampler. These samples were

taken as grab samples.Necessary precautions were taken for preservation of

samples.Sampling locations with source & date of sampling is given in Table 3.7.

The samples collection procedure was adopted from ‘Standard Methods’ for the

examination of Water and Wastewater published by American Public Health

Association (APHA) and IS 10500-2012.The samples were analyzed for Physico-

chemical parameters to assess the existing water quality of the area (based on IS:

10500-2012&APHA/AWWA, 23rdedition). The water sampling locations marked within

the study area and the result of the analysis (ground water and surface water) is

presented in the Figure 3.9&Table 3.19&3.20respectively.

Table 3.7 Sampling locations with source & date of sampling

Ground Water Sampling Locations

Sample Code

Location Date of Sampling

Taluka District

GW1 Project site 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW2 Bagodara 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW3 Sarala 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW4 Rohika 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW5 Shiyal 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW6 Gundanapara 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW7 Mithapur 17/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

GW8 Jansali 17/02/2018 Limbdi Surendranagar



Surface Water Sampling Locations

Sample Code

Location Date of Sampling

Taluka District

SW1 Bagodara 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW2 Gundanapara 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW3 Rohika 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW4 Mithapur 17/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW5 Shiyal 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

SW6 Dhingda 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

3.10.3 Surface Water Quality (Primary data)

Surface water samples were collected from ponds ofBagodara, Gundanapara, Rohika,

Mithapur, Shiyal&DhingdaVillage. Analysis of the same is given in Table 3.20.The

results have been compared with the drinking water quality standards specified in IS:

10500-2012. It was observed that, all the physico-chemical parameters and heavy

metals from surface water samples,except turbidity in all samples and TDS in

Rohikavillageare below stipulated drinking water standardsand selected source are

suitable for domestic purposes.

3.10.4 Ground Water Quality

The results of the ground water quality monitored during the study period are given in

Table 3.19. Sampling location is shown in Figure 3.9.

3.10.5 Interpretation

The samples were taken as grab samples and analysed for various parameters of

ground water. Summary is given below:

Color: All the samples were found colorless meeting desirable norms.

pH: All the samples meet the desirable standards (pH ranges from 7.5-7.9).

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS):TDS in samples ranges from 1963 mg/L (Bagodara) to

2948 mg/L (Jansali), all the samples exceed the permissible limit of 2000 mg/L, except

Bagodara village, which is almost close to permissible limit.

Calcium: Calcium contents in the water ranges from 68 mg/L (Sarala) to 109 mg/L

(Shiyal), all the samples meet the permissible limit of 200 mg/L(Permissible Limit in

the Absence of Alternate Source).

Magnesium: Magnesium content in the water ranges from 37 mg/L (Shiyal) to 52mg/L

(Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible limit of 100 mg/L(Permissible Limit

in the Absence of Alternate Source).



Sulfate:Sulfate content in the water ranges from 104 mg/L (Bagodara) to 204mg/L

(Jansali). All the samples meet the permissible limitof 400 mg/L(Permissible Limit in


Fluoride: Fluoride content in the water ranges from 0.63mg/L (Shiyal&Jansali) to

0.72mg/L (Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible limit (1.5 mg/L).

Total Alkalinity: Total alkalinity in the water samples ranges from 349mg/L

(Sarala&Rohika) to 410 mg/L (Project site). All the samples are within the permissible

limit of drinking water (600 mg/L) (Permissible Limit in the Absence of Alternate

Source).

Other Parameters: Potassium (ranges from 42 mg/L to 103 mg/L), Sodium (ranges

from 622 mg/L to 1002 mg/L) and Chloride (ranges from 958 mg/L to 1486

mg/L).Chlorides in all the samples exceed the permissible limit of 1000 mg/L, except

Bagodara village.

Heavy metals like cadmium,copper, lead, chromium, iron and zinc are well below the

limit in all samples.

3.10.6 Conclusion

The results have been compared with the drinking water quality standards specified in

IS: 10500-2012. It is found that,all the samples meet the permissible limit authority

(BIS), except TDS & Chloride. TDS and Chloride in all the samples,except Bagodara

village exceed the permissible limit of BIS. Indian Standard specification for drinking

water is given in Table 3.21.

3.11 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Noise can be defined as an unwanted sound. The definition of noise as unwanted sound

implies that it has an adverse effect on human beings and their environment. The noise

level variation can be temporal, spatial. It interferes with speech and hearing and is

intense enough to damage hearing or is otherwise annoying. Noise can also disturb

natural wildlife and ecological system. It is therefore, necessary to measure both the

quality as well as the quantity of noise in and around the proposed site.

3.11.1 Instrument used for Sampling and Monitoring

The intensity of sound energy in the environment is measured in a logarithmic scale

and is expressed in a decibel, dB(A) scale. Sound Level Meter (SLM) is used for the

collection of data related to noise at an interval of one hour. The day noise levels have

been monitored during 6:00 am to 10:00 pm and night noise levels during 10:00 pm to



6:00 am at all the ten locations. Noise levels recorded at each station are computed for

equivalent noise levels. Noise monitoring methodology is given in below Table 3.8.

Table 3.8 Monitoring Methodology of Noise

Environment

Component

Sampling

Location

Test method Instrument

used

Make

Ambient

Noise level

10

Locations

As per manufacturers

Manual

Sound Level

Meter

Mextech-SL-

4012

3.11.2 Noise Quality Monitoring Locations

The noise survey was conducted to assess the background noise levels in different

zones. Noise level measurements have been made at 10 locations within the study area

using Sound Level Meter. Based on theGazettes Notification (S.O. 123(E)) of MoEF dated

February 14, 2000 on ambient air quality standards, 10 monitoring locations were

selected. The noise monitoring locations & its results are given in Figure 3.10 & Table

3.22 respectively.

3.11.3 Ambient Noise Standards

Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF) has notified the noise standards vide

Gazette Notification dated February 14, 2000 for different zones viz. industrial,

commercial, residentialand silence zones under the Environment Protection Act

(1986). These standards are given in Table-3.23.

3.11.4 Results

The noise levels of various locations are given in Table 3.22. The monitored noise level

in the day time Leq (Ld) varies from 50.0to 56.6dB (A) and the night time Leq (Ln)

varies from 40.6to 45.9dB(A) within the study area. Higher noise value of 56.6dB(A)

was recorded during day time Nr. Bus stop Bagodara & lower noise value of 40.6 dB(A)

was recorded during night time at Primary School Shiyal.

3.11.5 Conclusion

Based on the observations made during the studies, it is concluded that; the noise levels

recorded at various locations in the study area show considerable fluctuations because

of changes in traffic movement, commercial and other domestic activities in the study

area.Overall the ambient noise level in the monitored locations was found to be within

the permissible limits stipulated for residential, industrial areas, silence and

commercial zone.

3.12 SOIL ENVIRONMENT

Soils may be defined as a thin layer of earth’s crust that serves as a natural medium for

the growth of plants. It is the unconsolidated mineral matter that has been subjected to



and influenced by genetic and environmental factors. Soils serve as a reservoir of

nutrients for plants and crops and also provide mechanical anchorage and favourable

tilth.

The objective of the soil sampling is:

To determine the baseline soil characteristics;

To monitor the impact on soil (pollutant deposition/other) in long run.

The sub soil condition below the existing ground level is almost uniform in nature. Sub

soil is composed of Clay mixed with little fine grained silty sand, moram and Kankar

with low resistivity due to clay and soil moisture.

3.12.1 Soil sampling locations

Soil quality of the study area is one of the important components for environment

impact assessment. The composite soil samples were collected from the study area

from eight locations (Project site,Bagodara, Sarala, Rohika, Shiyal, Gunadnapara,

Mithapurand Jansali) and were analysed for different parameters. The location of the

samplingis given below in Table 3.9. Results are given in Table 3.24and depictedin

Figure 3.11.

Table 3.9 Location of soil sampling

Sample

Code

Locations Date of

sampling

Tehsil District

S1 Project site 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S2 Bagodra 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S3 Sarala 15/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S4 Rohika 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S5 Shiyal 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S6 Gundanapara 16/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S7 Mithapur 17/02/2018 Bavla Ahmedabad

S8 Jansali 17/02/2018 Limbdi Surendranagar

3.12.2 Methodology

To understand the soil quality of the study area, analysis of all eight locations including

the project site was conducted by making suspension of soil sample. The samples were

examined forvarious physical and chemical characteristics in order to assess the quality

of soil. Analysis was done by using following methodology.

Table 3.10Methodology of Soil Sample analysis

Sampling Parameters

Sample collection

Analytical Equipment

Methodology Remarks

Porosity Manual sample Collection in

- IS: 2720 Part 7 Trial pit method Water holding - -



capacity polyethylene bags using an Auger

for topsoil sample

collection; disturbed samples

Permeability - IS: 2720 Part 17

Moisture content Electronic Balance

IS: 2720 Part 2

Texture - IS: 2720 Part 4

Particle size Distribution

Glass wares

IS: 2720 Part 4

5% Leachate to

be made and analyzed as

per APHA,

“Standard Methods”

All method numbers are

as per APHA “Standard Methods”

(23rdedition)

Cation Exchange Capacity

Centrifuge IS: 2720 Part 24 (1976)

SAR F. Photometer (Na, K)

Titration (Ca& Mg)

Calculation

pH pH Meter 4500 H+B

Electrical Conductivity

Conductivity Meter

As per IS 14767 -2000

Calcium Glass wares 3500 Ca B

Magnesium Glass wares 3500 Mg B

Sodium (Na) Flame Photometer

3500 Na B

Potassium

Flame Photometer

3500 K B

3.12.3 Corollaries

Physical Parameters

Particle Size: A Particle size of the different constituents (clay, silt, sand and gravel)

controls the porosity and water holding characteristic of the soil. Clay (size<0.002 mm)

amount in the soil samples ranges from 10% to 16%; Silt (size 0.002 to 0.075 mm) in

the soil samples is 16% to 23% and Sand (size 0.075 to 0.475 mm) in the soil samples is

35% to 44%, while Gravel (size>4.75 mm) in the soil samples is 22% to 33%. Analysis

shows that the soil has moderate water holding capacity.

Porosity: Porosity is a measure of space in between soil particles caused by structural

conditions and determined under identical conditions. Porosity of soil samples of the

study area ranges from 41.7% to 44.1%.

Water Holding Capacity (WHC): Water Holding Capacity (WHC) of soil samples of the

study area ranges from 39% to 47%.

Bulk Density: Bulk Density of soils in the study area is found to be in the range from

1.38to 1.44g/cm3.

Chemical Parameters

pH: pH of soils in the study area is found to be in the range of 7.6to 8.0.

Chloride: Chloride content in soils of the study area is found to be in the range of

1012to 1866 mg/kg.



Soluble Calcium: The soluble calcium as CaCO3 in soil samples is found to be in the

range of 590 to 891 mg/kg.

Magnesium: Magnesium content in soil samples of the study area ranges from 369 to

486mg/kg.

Total Phosphorus: Available Phosphorus content in soil samples of the study area

ranges from 21to 112mg/kg.

Total Nitrogen: Available nitrogen content in soil samples of the study area is found to

be in the range from 98 to 117mg/kg.

Potassium: Potassium content in soil samples of the study area is found to be in the

range from 97 to 189mg/kg.

Sodium: Sodium content in soil samples of the study area is found to be in the range

from 2018 to 2846 mg/kg.

Total Organic Matter (TOM): Total organic matter content in soil samples of the study

area is found to be in the range of 3.8to 5.3mg/kg.

3.12.4 Conclusion

In the study area, variations in the pH value ranging from 7.6to 8.0which shows that the

soil is slightly alkaline in nature. Organic Matter ranges from 3.8to 5.3mg/kg in the soil

samples. Soil of the study area is known to be good for cultivation. Generally, soils with

low bulk density have favourable physical conditions (porosity and permeability)

whereas those with high bulk density exhibit poor physical conditions for agriculture

crops.

3.13 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

An ecological study of the ecosystem is essential to understand the impact of

industrialization and urbanization on existing flora and fauna of the study area.The

biological study was undertaken as a part of the EIA study report to:

Understand the present status of ecosystem prevailing in the study area.

Compare it with past condition with the help of available data.

Predict changes in the biological environment as a result of present activities

and to suggest measures for maintaining its health.

The survey was conducted to study the flora & fauna in 10 km radius. Some of the

information was gathered from the local habitants. All the collected data were classified

to interpret the impact of pollution on the flora and fauna of the region.



3.13.1 Period of the study

The baseline study, for the assessment of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the

terrestrial environment, within 10 km radius from the site was conducted during

January, 2018 to March,2018.

3.13.2 Study methodology

Survey methodology was based on the flora and fauna species identification in person,

recently recorded and found in the region by the localities. Sampling of grass species

was carried out by quadrat sampling method to examine the species distribution and its

frequency in the region.

Quadrate Sampling Method:

A quadrat (or plot-based) survey is a quantitative examination of species distribution &

abundance. Quadrats are more likely to detect inconspicuous species because a smaller

area is sampled in a concentrated search. The survey was carried out for the vegetation

ground cover found in the road edges by 1 m2 quadrat and study on the edge effect due

to rapid industrialization and urbanization.

3.13.3 Floral species in the study area

Flora is basically the plant life that is present in a particular region or habitat at a

particular time. List of flora found in the study area is tabulated in Table 3.25.

3.13.4 Fauna in the study area

Fauna is the animal life that is present in a particular region or habitat at a particular

time. Irrespective of its unfriendly terrain, Gujarat gives shelter to a variety of animals

and birds. They live in smaller herds and thrive mainly on wild grasses and various

types of shrubs.

Faunal biodiversity with their scientific names and common names is presented in

Table 3.26.

3.14 TRAFFIC SURVEY

Reconnaissance

The traffic survey, to ascertain the traffic density in the study area was conducted on

the road near the project site. The objective of traffic study and emission quantification

is to assess the magnitude of the emissions resulting from two-wheelers, three

wheelers, and four wheelers that are extensively used as a means of common transport

within the urban areas.



Traffic survey of the Study Area

The traffic survey, to ascertain the traffic density in the study area was conducted on

the road near to the project site and also to evaluate the impacts of the increased traffic

due to the proposed activity. The methodology adopted for carrying out the traffic

study was to select the major roads around the project site and count the various

categories of vehicles moving on these roads given in Table 3.27.

Level of Service

Sr. No. Existing Volume/ Capacity Ratio

Level of Services

1 0.0 to 0.2 “A” (Excellent) 2 0.2 to 0.4 “B” (Very Good) 3 0.4 to 0.6 “C” (Good) 4 0.6 to 0.8 “D” (Fair) 5 0.8 to 1.0 “E” (Poor)

Baseline/ Existing Traffic Scenario & Level of Services

The road from Bagodara-Rajkot-Bagodara is four lane roadwith divider (two ways) and

all types of vehicles move on the road.

Capacity of road as per IRC = 3600 PCU’s/hr.

Total Volume during Peak Hours = 2113 PCU’s/hr (Table 3.27)

Existing Volume/Capacity ratio = 2113/3600= 0.587

The level of service is “C” that is good but near to Fair

3.15 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

An essential part of environmental study is socio-economic environment incorporating

various facts related to socio-economic conditions in the area, which deals with the

total environment. Socio economic study includes demographic structure of the area,

provision of basic amenities viz., housing, education, health and medical services,

occupation, water supply, sanitation, communication, transportation as well as feature

of aesthetic significance such as temples, historical monuments etc. at the baseline

level. This would help in visualizing and predicting the possible impact depending upon

the nature and magnitude of the project.Socio-economic study of an area provides a

good opportunity to assess the socioeconomic conditions of an area.

3.15.1 Objective of the study

The objectives of this socio-economic report consist of:

To conduct socio-economic assessment study in lease Area

To help in providing better living standards.

To know the current socio-economic situation in the region to cover the sub sectors

of education, health, sanitation, water and food security.

To provide employment opportunities.



3.15.2 Land use pattern and infrastructure

The land use pattern indicates the manner in which different parts of land in an area is

being utilized or non-utilized. It is an important indicator of environmental health;

human activity and a degree of inter play between these two. Even though the soil

quality, water availability and climate have strong influence on agriculture and

vegetation, the human activity may alter the natural environment to a large extent to

suit human needs. Unnatural land use often triggers rapid environmental deterioration

and disturbs ecological balance. In census records, major land use classifications are;

Forests, Culturable land, Culturable wasteland and area not available for cultivation.

Culturable land is further classified as: irrigated and un-irrigated. Area not available for

cultivation includes lands put to non-agriculture uses as well as barren and

uncultivable lands.

The main land use in area is for dwellings, infrastructure and related activities.

However, the land use pattern for rural areas is discussed below. The information is

preliminary based on 2011 Census as depicting in Table 3.28. Total land area is

34007.6 ha, out of that Irrigated area is 9428.1 ha. It constitutes 27.72% of the total

land area. 11713.4 ha are un-irrigated by source and it constitutes 34.44% of total land

area. The study area consist of Cultivable wasteland is 1490.2 ha (4.38%). Area not

available for cultivation is 3554.8 ha & it constitute 10.45%.

3.15.3 Demographic and Socio-Economic Environment

The demographic and Socio-economic details of the study area are discussed below.

These are primarily based on census data of 2011. Data on number of households,

population as well as literacy and employment pattern in the study area have been

presented in Table 3.29. The employment pattern in the area is indicator of number of

persons employed in various sectors. It also indicates the various categories of

employment flourishing in the area. The Study area in 10 km radius has 42 villages

including project site.

The total no. of household in the villages are 6152 and the total population is 30879

(51.96% men & 48.04% women). 56.69% of are literate while literacy rate among men

&women is 66.65% &45.92% respectively. 49.08% of male population is part of main

worker, while only 10.64% of female population is a part of main workers. 5.55% of

male workers are marginal workers, while 19.52% of female workers are engaged in

such type of activities. 45.37% of male population and 69.84% of female population are

non-workers.



3.15.4 Living Standard and Infrastructure

In India it is not possible to setup a primary standard of living because of wide

variations in terms of income, economic conditions, social custom, employment

opportunity, pattern of spending, etc. However, availability of amenities like education,

medical, water supply, communication, road network, electricity, etc. significantly

reflects the level of development of the area. Information on available amenities in the

study area has been extracted from census record of 2011. Total numbers of village in

study area are 13. On the basis of data presented in the Table3.30, the status of

available amenities is discussed in following sub-sections:

Educational Facilities

As per 2011 census, there are 14 primary schools, 4 Secondary schools, 2 senior

secondary school in all 13 villages.

Medical Facilities

13 villages in the study area have 1 Primary Health Centre, 4 Primary Health Sub

Centre, 1 Veterinary hospital, 1 Family Welfare Centre in study area of 10 km.

Drinking Water Supply

All the villages in the study area have mainly tap water supply as a source of drinking

water. In addition to this, some of the villages have facility of Tube well water supply,

Hand Pump water facility, Well water facility, tank water facility, 3 villages have

River/canal.

Communication and Transport

The main mode of public transport available in the study area is by bus service. One

village have approach to railway station as western railway line is passing through

nearby. 11 villages out of 13 villages in the study area are connected with Pucca road. 4

villages have water bound macadam facilities, 6 villages are connected with the State

highways and 4 villages are connected with the national highways. All the villages have

footpath facility.

Post and Telegraph

As per 2011 census record out of 13 villages in study area, 9villages have Sub post

office facility at doorstep & phone facility.

Power Supply

As per 2011 census record almost all the villages are getting power supply for all

purposes.



Table 3.11: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

(Monitoring Period: January, 2018 to March, 2018)

Sr. No.

Sampling Location Direction w.r.t project site

Distance in km

Type of Area

1 Project site(A1) -- 0.0 Industrial

2 Bagodra(A2) ENE(UW) 3.29 Residential

3 Sarala (A3) NE(UW) 5.57 Residential

4 Rohika (A4) ENE (UW) 7.84 Residential

5 Shiyal (A5) N(UW) 6.22 Residential

6 Gundanapara(A6) SE(DW) 3.52 Residential

7 Mithapur(A7) WSW (DW) 4.08 Residential

8 Jansali (A8) SW(DW) 6.20 Residential



Table 3.12: Ambient Air Quality Status


Sr.

No.

Sampling Station PM10

(g/m3)

PM2.5

(g/m3)

SO2

(g/m3)

NOx

(g/m3)

Average (Min-Max)

1 Project site (A1) 64.9

(56.6-76.0)

34.0

(30.1-41.5)

13.6

(10.3-17.9)

19.6

(17.3-24.4)

2 Bagodra (A2) 67.6

(62.4-70.8)

32.6

(29.0-37.4)

14.4

(11.3-16.5)

16.2

(13.8-17.8)

3 Sarala (A3) 66.4

(61.7-71.9)

33.9

(29.0-37.3)

11.9

(9.6-13.8)

14.4

(12.1-16.5)

4 Rohika (A4) 73.4

(68.9-77.2)

41.3

(35.8-45.5)

15.8

(13.7-18.2)

16.6

(14.2-20.9)

5 Shiyal (A5) 65.4

(61.0-68.9)

33.5

(27.5-42.4)

12.7

(9.6-14.7)

17.4

(13.2-19.4)

6 Gundanapara(A6) 66.5

(50.6-76.7)

33.8

(26.0-43.6)

13.3

(10.1-17.1)

16.1

(13.4-21.6)

7 Mithapur (A7) 65.4

(61.0-68.9)

33.5

(27.5-42.4)

12.8

(11.1-14.7)

15.5

(13.9-17.1)

8 Jansali (A8) 59.7

(56-63.5)

35.9

(29.9-40.3)

10.9

(9.6-12.3)

13.6

(12.2-15.3)

Figure 3.2 Graphical representation of Ambient Air Quality



Table 3.13: Ambient Air Quality Status (PM10)


Average-24 Hours Unit-g/m3

Station Name Max Min 98th Percentile

75th Percentile

50th Percentile

25th percentile

Avg. SD

Project site(A1) 76.0 56.6 75.4 71.7 62.7 60.8 64.9 6.2

Bagodra(A2) 70.8 62.4 70.8 69.2 67.8 66.7 67.6 2.3

Sarala (A3) 71.9 61.7 71.5 68.8 66.2 63.7 66.4 3.1

Rohika (A4) 77.2 68.9 77.1 75.0 73.7 71.5 73.4 2.3

Shiyal (A5) 68.9 61.0 68.8 67.1 65.1 64.4 65.4 2.2

Gundanapara(A6) 76.7 50.6 76.6 72.0 65.9 64.0 66.5 6.5

Mithapur(A7) 68.9 61.0 68.8 67.1 65.1 64.4 65.4 2.2

Jansali (A8) 63.5 56.0 63.4 61.3 59.3 58.1 59.7 2.2

Figure 3.3 Graphical representation for PM10



Table 3.14: Ambient Air Quality Status (PM2.5)




75th Percentile

50th Percentile

25th percentile

Avg. SD

Project site(A1) 41.5 30.1 40.7 35.6 33.3 32.3 34.0 3.0

Bagodra(A2) 37.4 29.0 37.0 34.5 32.4 30.6 32.6 2.5

Sarala (A3) 37.3 29.0 37.2 35.6 34.0 32.5 33.9 2.3

Rohika (A4) 45.5 35.8 45.2 43.6 41.6 39.0 41.3 2.8

Shiyal (A5) 42.4 27.5 41.3 35.8 33.1 31.3 33.5 3.5

Gundanapara(A6) 43.6 26.0 41.8 34.2 33.5 32.8 33.8 3.5

Mithapur(A7) 42.4 27.5 41.3 35.8 33.1 31.3 33.5 3.5

Jansali (A8) 40.3 29.9 40.3 38.9 35.7 34.3 35.9 3.0

Figure 3.4 Graphical representation for PM2.5



Table 3.15: Ambient Air Quality Status (SO2)




75th Percentile

50th Percentile

25th percentile

Avg. SD

Project site(A1) 17.9 10.3 17.8 14.3 13.2 12.1 13.6 2.0

Bagodra(A2) 16.5 11.3 16.4 15.9 14.5 13.2 14.4 1.6

Sarala (A3) 13.8 9.6 13.8 12.6 11.9 11.2 11.9 1.2

Rohika (A4) 18.2 13.7 17.8 16.6 16.0 15.0 15.8 1.1

Shiyal (A5) 14.7 9.6 14.5 13.4 12.8 12.2 12.7 1.2

Gundanapara(A6) 17.1 10.1 16.9 14.6 12.8 12.0 13.3 2.0

Mithapur(A7) 14.7 11.1 14.5 13.4 12.8 12.3 12.8 1.0

Jansali (A8) 12.3 9.6 12.0 11.4 11.0 10.5 10.9 0.6

Figure 3.5 Graphical representation for SO2



Table 3.16: Ambient Air Quality Status (NOx)




75th Percentile

50th Percentile

25th percentile

Avg. SD

Project site(A1) 24.4 17.3 24.2 20.7 18.8 17.7 19.6 2.2

Bagodra(A2) 17.8 13.8 17.7 17.1 16.3 15.8 16.2 1.2

Sarala (A3) 16.5 12.1 16.4 15.4 14.4 13.7 14.4 1.2

Rohika (A4) 20.9 14.2 19.4 17.0 16.4 16.0 16.6 1.2

Shiyal (A5) 19.4 13.2 19.3 18.4 17.4 16.9 17.4 1.4

Gundanapara(A6) 21.6 13.4 21.3 16.5 14.8 14.6 16.1 2.6

Mithapur(A7) 17.1 13.9 17.1 16.2 15.4 14.9 15.5 1.0

Jansali (A8) 15.3 12.2 15.1 14.2 13.5 13.0 13.6 0.8

Figure 3.6 Graphical representation for NOx



Table 3.17: Ambient Air Quality Status

(CO, HC (Methane & non-Methane), VOC)


Unit-g/m3

Station Name CO

(g/m3)

Hydro Carbon (g/m3) VOC (g/m3)

Methane Non-

Methane

Benzene Toluene Xylene Total

Project site(A1) 1192 35.2 1094 0.24 BDL BDL 0.24

Bagodra(A2) 1210 43.2 1233 0.35 BDL 0.19 0.54

Sarala (A3) 1084 32.5 1173 BDL BDL BDL BDL

Rohika (A4) 1045 32.0 1084 0.19 BDL BDL 0.19

Shiyal (A5) 1104 30.1 1109 0.21 BDL BDL 0.21

Gundanapara(A6) 1054 26.6 1187 BDL BDL BDL BDL

Mithapur(A7) 1304 40.0 1181 0.32 0.16 BDL 0.48

Jansali (A8) 1028 35.1 1129 BDL BDL BDL BDL

*BDL – Below Detectable limit



Table 3.18: National Ambient Air Quality Standards

(EP, 7th amendment rules-2009) Pollutants Time-weighted

average Concentration in ambient air

Industrial, Residential,

Rural and others area

Ecologically Sensitive area

(Notified by Central Government)

Method of Measurement

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), µg/m3

Annual Average* 50 20 Improved west and Gaeke method

Ultraviolet fluorescence 24 hours** 80 80

Oxides of Nitrogen as (NO2), µg/m3

Annual Average* 40 30 Modified Jacob &Hochheiser

(Na-Arsenate) Chemiluminescence

24 hours** 80 80

Particulate Matter (Size less than 10 µm or PM10, µg/m3

Annual Average* 60 60 Gravimetric TOEM Beta attenuation

24 hours** 100 100

Particulate Matter (Size less than 2.5 µm or PM2.5, µg/m3

Annual Average* 40 40 Gravimetric TOEM Beta attenuation

24 hours** 60 60

Ozone (O3) µg/m3

8 hours ** 100 100 UV photometric Chemiluminescence Chemical Method

1hours** 180 180

Lead (Pb) µg/m3

Annual Average* 0.50 0.50 AAS/ICP method after sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper

ED-XRF using Teflon filter

24 hours** 1.0 1.0

CarbonMonoxide (CO) mg/m3

8 hours** 02 02 Non Dispersive Infra Red (NDIR) spectroscopy 1 hour** 04 04

Ammonia (NH3) µg/m3

Annual Average* 100 100 Chemiluminescence Indophenol Blue Method 24 hours** 400 400

Benzene (C6H6) µg/m3

Annual* 05 05 Gas chromatography based continuous analyzer

Adsorption and desorption followed by GC analysis

Benzo(a) Pyrine (BaP)-particulate phase only, ng/m3

Annual* 01 01 Solvent extraction followed by HPLC/GC analysis

Arsenic (As), ng/m3

Annual* 06 06 AAS/ICP method after sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper

Nickel (Ni) ng/m3

Annual* 20 20 AAS/ICP method after sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper

* Annual Arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.

** 24 hourly/8 hourly or 01 hourly values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in a year. 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits but not two consecutive days of monitoring.



Table 3.19: Results of Groundwater Quality in the Study Area

(Date of Sampling: 15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018) Parameters Unit CONCENTRATION

Project site (GW1)

Bagodara (GW2)

Sarala (GW3)

Rohika (GW4)

Shiyal (GW5)

Gundanapara (GW6)

Mithapur (GW7)

Jansali (GW8)

pH pH Unit 7.8 7.7 7.6 7.7 7.5 7.8 7.8 7.9

Color Co-Pt Unit Color less

Color less

Color less

Color less

Color less

Color less

Color less

Color less

Conductivity Micro mhos/cm

3820 2770 3410 3325 4140 3445 3710 4155

Turbidity NTU 6.8 5.6 4.3 6.9 5.8 5.6 5.7 5.5

TDS mg/L 2710 1963 2409 2360 2935 2442 2630 2948

Total Hardness as CaCO3

mg/L 426 419 380 362 425 371 380 447

Total Alkalinity mg/L 410 365 349 349 374 352 390 405

Sodium as Na+ mg/L 832 622 847 810 1001 878 912 1002

Potassium as K+ mg/L 103 71 55 65 58 42 53 55

Calcium as Ca+2 mg/L 85 87 68 69 109 76 88 103

Magnesium as Mg+2 mg/L 52 49 51 46 37 44 39 46

Chlorides as Cl- mg/L 1310 958 1155 1049 1435 1228 1258 1486

Sulfates as SO4-2 mg/L 112 104 170 178 203 129 193 204

Fluoride as F- mg/L 0.72 0.66 0.69 0.68 0.63 0.70 0.71 0.63

Nitrates as NO3-3 mg/L 20 21 17 19 21 17 18 16

Phenol mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Cyanide as CN- mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Arsenic as As mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Cadmium as Cd mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Lead as Pb mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Manganese as Mn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Iron as Fe mg/L 0.34 0.22 0.20 0.28 0.19 0.22 0.22 0.25

Total Chromium mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Zinc as Zn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

% Sodium -- 76.3 72.5 80.2 79.7 81.2 81.7 81.4 80.7



Table 3.20: Surface Water analysis of study area

(Date of Sampling:15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018)

Parameters Unit CONCENTRATION

Bagodara

Pond

(SW1)

Gunda Na

Para

Pond

(SW2)

Rohika

Pond

(SW3)

Mithapur

Pond

(SW4)

Shiyal

Pond

(SW5)

Dhingda

Pond

(SW6)

pH pH Unit 7.46 7.51 8.02 7.82 7.48 7.51

Conductivity Micro

mhos/cm

590 635 3620 590 650 855

Turbidity NTU 12.3 10.9 10.5 14.3 16.2 14.1

TDS mg/L 410 442 2514 415 452 592

Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 6.6 6.6 5.1 5.8 5.9 4.9

Total Hardness as

CaCO3

mg/L 133 144 481 137 208 233

Total Alkalinity mg/L 226 242 385 235 224 269

Sodium as Na+ mg/L 123 135 835 116 102 169

Potassium K+ mg/L 23 28 40 28 20 28

Calcium Ca+2 mg/L 22 18 46 17 34 34

Magnesium Mg+2 mg/L 19 24 89 23 30 36

Chlorides as Cl- mg/L 113 136 1310 135 179 224

Sulfates as SO4-2 mg/L 56 67 132 63 51 52

Nitrates as NO3-3 mg/L 8.1 7.2 8.8 7.0 5.7 6.4

Phenol as CH3OH mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Cyanide as CN- mg/L <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Arsenic as As mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Cadmium as Cd mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Copper as Cu mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Lead as Pb mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Manganese as Mn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Iron as Fe mg/L 0.19 0.18 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.26

Total Chromium mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Zinc as Zn mg/L <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01

Total Coliform MPN/ml 30 30 620 52 46 42



Table 3.21: Indian Standard Specification for Drinking Water

Sr. No.

Parameters Desirable Limit Permissible Limit in the Absence of Alternate

Source

I Essential Characteristics

1. Colour, Hazen Units, Max. 5 25

2. Odour Unobjectionable -

3. Taste Agreeable -

4. Turbidity, NTU, Max. 5 10

5. pH 6.5-8.5 No Relaxation

6. Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l, Max. 300 600

7. Iron (as Fe) mg/l, Max. 0.3 1.0

8. Chlorides (as Cl) mg/l, Max. 250 1000

9. Residual Free Chlorine, mg/l, Min. 0.20* -

II Desirable Characteristics

10. Dissolved Solids, mg/l, Max. 500 2000

11. Alkalinity (as CaCO3), mg/l, Max. 200 600

12. Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l, Max. 200 400

13. Nitrate (as NO3) 45 100

14. Fluoride (as F) mg/l, Max. 1.0 1.5

15. Calcium (as Ca) mg/l, Max. 75 200

16. Magnesium (as Mg) mg/l, Max. 30 100

17. Copper (as Cu) mg/l, Max. 0.05 1.5

18. Manganese (as Mn) mg/l, Max. 0.1 0.3

19. Mercury (as Hg) mg/l, Max. 0.001 No Relaxation

20. Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l, Max. 0.01 No Relaxation

21. Selenium (as Se) mg/l, Max. 0.01 No Relaxation

22. Arsenic (As As) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

23. Cyanide (as CN) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

24. Lead (as Pb) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

25. Zinc (as Zn) mg/l, Max. 5 15

26. Aluminium (as Al) mg/l, Max. 0.03 0.2

27. Boron (as B) mg/l, Max. 1 5

28. Chromium (as Cr) mg/l, Max. 0.05 No Relaxation

29. Phenolic Compounds (as C6H5OH) mg/l, Max. 0.001 0.002

30. Anionic Detergents (as MBAS) mg/l, Max. mg/l, Max.

0.2 1.0

31. Mineral Oil mg/l, Max. 0.01 0.03

32. Pesticides Absent 0.001

33. Radioactive Materials a. Alpha Emitters, Bq/I, Max. b. Beta Emitters, Pci/I, Max

- -

0.1

0.037

Note: * Applicable only when water is chlorinated

Source: IS: 10500, 2012



Table 3.22: Ambient Noise Levels in the Study Area

(Date of Monitoring: 15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018)

Sr.

No.

Locations Ld/Ln Noise Level

dB(A)

1 Project site (N1) Ld 54.9

Ln 44.2

2 100 m West from the site (N2) Ld 53.1

Ln 43.4

3 250 m South from the site (N3) Ld 52.8

Ln 42.5

4 500 m North from the site (N4) Ld 54.0

Ln 42.9

5 1000 m East from the site (N5) Ld 56.3

Ln 41.9

6 Nr. Bus stop Bagodara(N6) Ld 56.6

Ln 42.3

7 Village Rohika (N7) Ld 52.1

Ln 41.5

8 Primary School Shiyal(N8) Ld 50.0

Ln 40.6

9 Village Gundanapara (N9) Ld 52.9

Ln 41.2

10 Village Mithapur(N10) Ld 56.5

Ln 45.9

Table 3.23

Ambient Air Quality Standards with respect to Noise

Zone Limits Leq, dB(A)

Day Time Night Time

Industrial 75 70

Commercial 65 55

Residential 55 45

Silence 50 40



Table 3.24: Soil Analysis of Study area

(Date of Sampling: 15/02/2018 to 17/02/2018)

Parameters Unit Concentration

Project site (S1)

Bagodra (S2)

Sarala (S3) Rohika (S4)

Shiyal (S5)

Gundanapara(S6)

Mithapur (S7)

Jansali (S8)

pH (5%)Solution 7.8 7.6 7.7 8.0 7.7 8.0 7.9 7.6

Loss of Ignition % 8.9 9.2 6.8 7.6 9.2 9.8 9.2 7.3

Particle Size

Clay (< 0.002 mm) % 12 15 12 10 14 16 13 14

Silt (0.002 - 0.075mm) % 23 21 19 21 18 20 16 20

Sand (0.075-0.475 mm % 44 39 36 41 35 35 39 41

gravel (size > 4.75 mm) % 22 25 33 28 33 29 31 25

Water Holding Capacity % 39 43 47 44 41 43 42 40

Permeability cm/hr 2.93 3.41 3.29 3.13 3.20 3.22 3.43 3.28

Bulk Density g/cm3 1.38 1.43 1.44 1.42 1.44 1.41 1.43 1.40

Porosity % 44.1 42.1 41.7 42.5 41.7 42.9 42.1 43.3

Sodium Absorption Ratio - 16.37 18.67 13.71 15.29 19.74 15.50 17.16 16.43

Sodium mg/kg 2344 2437 2018 2279 2846 2130 2399 2158

Potassium mg/kg 104 116 189 104 163 118 97 152

Calcium mg/kg 891 590 828 891 828 729 779 689

Magnesium mg/kg 396 419 486 473 446 419 419 369

Chlorides mg/kg 1866 1643 1012 1283 1012 1632 1352 1320

Sulphates mg/kg 604 528 540 464 540 500 396 488

Organic Matter mg/kg 5.3 4.5 3.8 4.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 5.0

Available Nitrogen mg/kg 117 110 103 102 102 101 98 106

Available Phosphorus mg/kg 86 78 21 112 59 79 110 101

Iron mg/kg 2.05 1.79 1.90 1.86 1.90 1.73 1.91 1.88

Manganese mg/kg 4.45 3.32 4.45 4.87 2.26 3.52 3.52 3.32

Cation exchange capacity (CEC)

- 18.21 17.33 17.45 18.57 20.65 16.70 18.07 16.29



Table 3.25

Floral Diversity

(A) Trees

Sr.

No.

Scientific Name Family Vernacular Name

1 Acacia auriculiformis Mimosaceae Australian Baval

2 Acacia caiehu Mimosaceae Khair

3 Acacia niloticaSubsp.Indica Mimosaceae Baval

4 Albizziaindica Mimosaceae Siris

5 Azadirachtaindica Meliaceae Limdo

6 Eucalytus globules Myrtaceae Nilgiri

7 Ficusvirens Moraceae Pipli

8 Leucenaleucocephala Mimosaceae PardesiBaval

9 Parkinsonia aculeate Caesalpiniaceae Ram Baval

10 Peltophorumpterocarpum Caesalpiniaceae Tamarafali

11 Pongamiapinnata fabaceae Karanj

12 Prosopisjuliflora Mimosaceae GandoBaval

13 Prosopisspicigera Mimosaceae Khijado

14 Roystonearegia Arecaceae Royal Palm

15 Salvadoraaleoides Salvadoraceae Pilvo

16 Salvadorapersica Salvadoraceae Pilvo

17 Samaneasaman Mimosaceae Rate Saeasdo

(B) Shrubs

Sr.

No.


1 Cadabaindica Capparidaceae Teliohemkand

2 Calotropis gigantean Asclepiadaceae Akado

3 Calotropisprocera Asclepiadaceae Akado

4 Capparissepiaria Capparidaceae Kerdo

5 Capparissepiaria Capparidaceae Kanthar

6 Euphorbia nerifolia Euphorbiaceae Thor

7 Ipomoea fistulosa Convolvulaceae Nafatio

8 Neriumindicum Apocynaceae LalKarne

9 Zizyphusrotundifolia Rhamnaceae ChaniBor



(C) Herbs

Sr.

No.


1 Abutilon indicum Malvaceae Khapat

2 Amaranthusviridis Amarathaceae -

3 Cassis pumpila Caesalpiniaceae Nani Chimed

4 Cenchrussetigerus Poaceae DhamanGhas

5 Chenopodium album Chenopodiaceae Chil

6 Chlorisbarbata Poaceae Mindadin

7 Clitoriatematea Fabaceae Gokern

8 Cynodoncretica Convolvulaceae Rudanti

9 Cynodondoctylon Poaceae Darbh

10 Cyperuscompressus Cyperraceae -

11 Daemiaextensa Asclepiadaceae ChamarDudheli

12 Echinopusechinatus Asteraceae Shulio

13 HeliotropiumSupinum Borginaceae GhedioOKharad

14 Heteropogencontortus Poaceae Dabhsuliu

15 Ipomphasestelata Convolvulaceae Nali Ni Bhaji

16 Nymphaeastelata Nymphaeaceae Poyana

17 Triumfeittarotundifolia Tiliaceae GolZipti

18 Typhaangustata Typhaceae Ramban

19 Xanthium strumarium Asteraceae Gokhuru

(D) Agricultural Crops

Sr.

No.

Scientific Name

Family Vernacular Name

1 Triticumaestivum Poaceae Gehu

2 Oryzasativa Poaceae Chokha

3 Sorghum vulgare Poaceae Bajra

4 Gossypiumherbaceum Malvaceae Kapas

5 Cuminum Apiaceae Jiru



Table 3.26

Faunal Biodiversity

(A) Amphibia

Sr. No.

Common Name Scientific Name

1 Skipper Frog Euphlyctiscyanophlytis

2 Common India Toad Bufomelanostictus

(B) Reptilia

Sr.No. Common Name

Scientific Name

1 Calotes CalotesVersicolor

2 Skink Mabuyacaninata

3 Wall Lizard Hemidoctylusflaviviridis

4 Wall Lizard Ptyas mucous

5 Cobra Najanaja

(C) Birds

Sr.No. Common Name

Scientific Name

1 Pond Heron ArdeolaGrayli

2 Cattle Egret Bulbulcus ibis

3 Pariah Kite Milvusmigrans

4 Red Wattled Lapwing Vanellusindicus

5 Blackwinged stilt HimanatopusHimantopus

6 Common Sandpiper Tringahypoleucos

7 Spotted dove StreptopeliaChinensis

8 Red turtle Dove Streptopliatrenquebarica

9 Blue Rock pigeon Columbia livia

10 Common Kingfisher Alcedoathis

11 White Breasted Kingfisher Halcyon Smyrensis

12 Small Green Bee-Eater Meropsorientalis

13 Indian Roller Corvussplendens

14 House Crow Corvussplendens

15 Common myna Aceredotherestristis

16 Red Vented Bulbal Pycnontuscafer

17 Jungle babbler Turdoidesstriatus

18 Indian Robin SaxicoloidesFulicata

19 House Sparrow Passardomesticus

(D) Mammals

Sr.No. Common Name

Scientific Name

1 Palm Squirre Funambuluspennati

2 Mongoose Herpestesedwardsii

3 Common Langur Presbytis entellus



(E) Annelida

Sr.No. Common Name

Scientific Name

1 House Cricket Achetadomesticus

2 cockroach Blattagermanica

3 House fly Muscadomestica

4 Mosquito Anopheles sp.

5 Striped tiger Danausgenutiagenutia

6 Mosquito Culex Sp.

7 Common Grass Yellow Euremahecabe simulate

8 Common Crow Euploea core core

9 Black Ant Pheidole sp.

10 Red Ant Oecophyllasmar

11 Wasp Vespa sp.

12 Bumble Bee Bombus sp.

13 Social Spider Stegodyphusarasinorum

14 Jumping spider Phidippuspunjabensis

15 Lynx Spider Oxyopesshweta

16 Funnel Web spider Hippasa sp.

17 Wolf spider Pardosemukundi

18 Wolf Spider Lycosa sp.

19 Garden Spider Argiopeanasuja



Table 3.27

Traffic Survey

Location: NH-8A (Ahmedabad-Rajkot)

Date of Traffic Survey: 23/01/2018

Two wheeler Three Wheeler Passenger cars Mini Bus Trucks, Buses Multi Exal Total vehicles

Hours V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr V/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr

0.5 0.8 1 1.5 3.5 4.5 06-07 am 60 30.0 31 24.8 243 243.0 25 37.5 175 612.5 29 130.5 563 1078 07-08 am 63 31.5 28 22.4 405 405.0 30 45.0 168 588.0 33 148.5 727 1240 08-09 am 103 51.5 52 41.6 599 599.0 96 144.0 189 661.5 59 265.5 1098 1763 09-10 am 114 57.0 59 47.2 662 662.0 115 172.5 266 931.0 54 243.0 1270 2113 10-11 am 65 32.5 30 24.0 254 254.0 49 73.5 222 777.0 43 193.5 663 1355 11-12 am 69 34.5 27 21.6 216 216.0 55 82.5 139 486.5 39 175.5 545 1017 12-01 pm 94 47.0 22 17.6 277 277.0 40 60.0 121 423.5 30 135.0 584 960 01-02 pm 69 34.5 20 16.0 190 190.0 30 45.0 144 504.0 33 148.5 486 938 02-03 pm 62 31.0 28 22.4 272 272.0 37 55.5 131 458.5 47 211.5 577 1051 03-04 pm 65 32.5 24 19.2 277 277.0 53 79.5 137 479.5 42 189.0 598 1077 04-05 pm 78 39.0 36 28.8 372 372.0 56 84.0 151 528.5 53 238.5 746 1291 05-06 pm 84 42.0 40 32.0 545 545.0 55 82.5 174 609.0 57 256.5 955 1567 06-07 pm 93 46.5 44 35.2 632 632.0 67 100.5 162 567.0 53 238.5 1051 1620 07-08 pm 73 36.5 28 22.4 270 270.0 65 97.5 107 374.5 33 148.5 576 949 08-09 pm 59 29.5 22 17.6 255 255.0 60 90.0 82 287.0 39 175.5 517 855

09-10 pm 39 19.5 12 9.6 130 130.0 40 60.0 155 542.5 56 252.0 432 1014 10-11 pm 33 16.5 8 6.4 114 114.0 27 40.5 157 549.5 47 211.5 386 938

11-12 pm 14 7.0 2 1.6 113 113.0 13 19.5 80 280.0 12 54.0 234 475 12-01 am 12 6.0 1 0.8 99 99.0 11 16.5 61 213.5 16 72.0 200 408 01-02 pm 8 4.0 0 0.0 55 55.0 5 7.5 50 175.0 10 45.0 128 287 02-03 pm 5 2.5 0 0.0 67 67.0 3 4.5 32 112.0 8 36.0 115 222 03-04 pm 7 3.5 0 0.0 91 91.0 0 0.0 37 129.5 5 22.5 140 247 04-05 pm 12 6.0 8 6.4 33 33.0 0 0.0 75 262.5 10 45.0 138 353 05-06 pm 18 9.0 14 11.2 59 59.0 5 7.5 83 290.5 14 63.0 193 440 Total 1299 649.5 536 428.8 6230 6230 937 1405.5 3098 10843 822 3699 12922 23256 Minimum 5 2.5 0 0 33 33 0 0 32 112 5 22.5 115 222 Maximum 114 57 59 47.2 662 662 115 172.5 266 931 59 265.5 1270 2113

The highest peak observed is 2113 PCU/hr during 09.0 am to 10.0 am



Table 3.28Land Use Pattern

Name of

Village

Total Area of

the Village

(ha)

Irrigated by

source

(ha)

Un-

irrigated

(ha)

Cultivable

waste

(ha)

Area not

available for

cultivation (ha)

Balol 4884.7 1670.1 1160.4 100 610

Jansali 1772.59 250.6 346 0 348.1

Mithapur 4579.2 291.6 2603.2 6 0.7

Kaliveji 2328.1 842.2 978.9 0 28.1

Shiyal 7323.5 3010 2811 95 1349.8

Kanotar 1569.6 400 611 140 100

Sarala 1016.4 327.2 495 0 1.6

Rohika 1626.6 854.9 462.8 107 12.2

Bagodara 3372.2 178.8 100.2 574.2 178

Memar 1086.7 405.9 169.1 439.8 2.3

Gundanapara 554.2 193.9 165 6.8 149

Dhingda 2195.8 538.9 710.2 21.4 775

Bhurkhi 1698 464 1100.6 0 0



Table: 3.29 Summary of Socio-economic status of Study area (Demography)

Name of the

Village/

Town/Ward

No. of

Occupied

Residential

House

Total Population

(Including institutional

and houseless

population)

Literates Total main

Workers

Marginal

Workers

Cultivators Agricultural

Labourer

Non-Worker

P M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

Balol 633 2657 1386 1271 1129 871 682 48 109 212 226 3 252 23 595 1011

Jansali 278 1304 681 623 494 362 261 18 140 353 113 5 98 9 280 252

Mithapur 652 3522 1812 1710 1229 780 897 92 85 134 504 22 217 15 830 1484

Kaliveji 129 699 354 345 223 142 166 27 0 6 117 1 25 25 188 312

Shiyal 1361 7485 3883 3602 2046 1166 1975 747 143 941 468 29 1376 694 1765 1914

Kanotar 327 1691 900 791 505 234 457 74 48 68 207 9 210 59 395 649

Sarala 196 939 498 441 226 113 252 53 3 2 115 1 122 52 243 386

Rohika 452 2216 1157 1059 812 455 542 213 60 3 91 6 332 199 555 843

Bagodara 1040 5088 2596 2492 1864 1206 1282 210 162 543 631 129 446 65 1152 1739

Memar 304 1453 778 675 637 459 363 18 14 207 47 3 287 11 401 450

Gundanapara 140 676 362 314 281 173 204 1 3 0 71 0 65 1 155 313

Dhingda 289 1313 675 638 481 334 365 60 8 51 106 5 168 48 302 527

Bhurkhi 351 1836 962 874 767 517 428 17 116 376 146 3 195 7 418 481



Table 3.30: Summary of Socio-economic status of Study area (Amenities)

Name of Village

Educational Facility

Medical Facility

Drinking Water

Facility

Communi-cation (Postor

Telegraph)

TransportationFacility

(Bus etc.)

Approach to Village

Nearest town and Distance

(Kms)

Power Supply

Balol P,S, SS

PHS,MCW(5-10),TBC(5-10) T SPO,PH,PCO BS PR,FP Dhandhuka EA

Jansali P, S(5-10) None of within 10km T,TK SPO,PH BS NH, PR, FP Limbdi EA

Mithapur P,S,SS(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS,MCW(5-10),TBC(5-10),VH(5-10),

FWC(<5)

T,TW,R/C, TK

PO(5-10),SPO,PH BS NH, PR(5-10),KR(5-10),WBM(5-10),FP

Bavla EA

Kaliveji P,S(5-10) PHS(5-10) T,TW,TK SPO(5-10),PH,PCO BS NH(5-10),PR,KR(5-10),FP

Bavla EA

Shiyal P(4),S,SS PHS,MCW(5-10),VH T,W,TW, R/C, TK

PO(5-10),SPO,PH,PCO

BS NH(5-10),SH,PR,KR(5-10),WBM(5-10),FP

Bavla EA

Kanotar P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10),VH(5-10),FWC(5-10)

T,TW,TK PO(5-10),SPO(5-10),PH,PCO(5-10)

BS NH(5-10),SH(5-10),PR,WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Sarala P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10), VH(5-10),FWC(5-10)

T,TW,R/C, TK

SPO(5-10),LL,PCO BS NH(5-10),SH(5-10),PR,WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Rohika P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10),MCW(5-10)

T PO(5-10),SPO,LL,PCO (5-

10)

BS,RS(5-10) NH,SH,PR,FP Bavla EA

Bagodara P(2),S PHC,PHS,D(5-10),VH(5-10),FWC

T SPO,PH,PCO BS,RS(5-10) NH,SH,PR,FP Bavla EA

Memar P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10), PHS(5-10)

T PO(5-10),SPO(5-10),LL,PCO

BS,RS(5-10) NH(5-10),SH,PR,FP Bavla EA

Gundanapara P,S(<5) VH(<5),FWC(<5) T,HP,TK PO(<5),SPO(<5), PH,PCO

BS,RS(5-10) NH(<5),SH,PR,KR,WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Dhingda P,S(<5) PHC(5-10),PHS(5-10),MCW(5-10),VH(5-

10),FWC(5-10)

T,TK PO(<5),SPO,PH, PCO

BS,RS(<5) NH(5-10),SH, PR(<5),KR(5-10),WBM,FP

Bavla EA

Bhurkhi P,S(5-10) PHC(5-10),PHS(<5),MCW(5-

10),TBC(5-10), FWC(5-10)

T,W,TW, TK

SPO,PH(<5),PCO BS,RS NH(<5),SH(5-10),PR,KR,FP

Dholka EA



Abbreviations:

Educational

PP - Pre-Primary school

P - Primary School

S - Secondary schools

SS - Senior Secondary School

Medical Facility

PHC - Primary Health Centre

PHS - Primary Health Sub-Centre

MCW - Maternity & Child welfare Centre

TBC - T.B. Clinic

FWC - Family Welfare Centre

D - Dispensary

VH - Veterinary Hospital

Drinking Water

T - Tap Water

W - Well Water

TK - Tank/ Pond/ Lake

HP - Hand pump

TW - Tube wells

R/C - River/Canal

Post and Telegraph

PO - Post Office

SPO - Sub Post Office

PH - Telephone Connection

PCO - Public Call Office

Transportation

BS - Bus

RS - Railway Station

Approach to Village

NH - National Highway

SH - State Highway

PR - Pucca Road

KR - Kutchcha Road

FP - Foot Path

WBM - Water Bounded Macadam Road

Power Supply

EA - Electricity for all purposes



Figure3.7

Location of AAQM station

Indicating AAQM stations

Project site



Figure 3.8

Wind Rose diagram



Figure 3.9

Water sampling Locations

Indicating Ground Water sampling location

IndicatingSurface Water Sampling location

Project site



Figure 3.10

Noisemonitoring locations

Indicating Noise Monitoring location

Project site

0

0

0

0

0 0

0

0

0

0



Figure 3.11

Soil Sampling Locations

Indicating locations of Soil sampling

Project site



Figure 3.12Toposheet of location with site location map of 10 km radius



Chapter-4

Anticipated Environmental Impacts& Mitigation

Measures

4.1 GENERAL

Environmental Impact can be defined as any change in environmental conditions which

may be adverse or beneficial; occurred due to action or set of actions under

consideration. It can be assessed by identifying the sources causing the impact and

predicting the same. The identification of environmental impacts has been made by co-

relating the relationship between project activity and environmental parameters. As a

part of present EIA study, anticipated environmental impacts associated with the

project activity of the unit have been identified. The project activities are usually

divided into two phases: Construction Phase and Operation Phase. For evaluation of

impacts due to proposed activities, baseline data has been utilized. Changes in the

environmental parameters & their impact in terms of short term or long term, positive

or negative, reversible & irreversible are identified & predicted.

The next step is prediction of impacts, which is an important component in

environmental impact assessment process. Several techniques and methodologies are

in vogue for predicting the impacts due to proposed industrial development on

physical, chemical, biological and socio-economic components of environment. Such

predictions delineate contribution to existing baseline condition for the proposed

project. The additional impacts due to proposed activities are analyzed by keeping in

mind the baseline status. This helps to assess the assimilative capacity of the

environment and in turn the gravity of the impacts. Based on the identification &

prediction of the nature of impact, it can be evaluated qualitatively and quantitatively.

In this chapter, the effect due to construction & operational activity of the proposed

project is explained.

4.2 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACT

This chapter deals with the assessment of project impacts on environment. Mitigation

measures are suggested to minimize the likely negative impacts. The network method

(Cause - effect) was adopted to identify potential impact of the proposed activity. It

includes stepwise study of relationship between an activity and its environmental

parameters. This method involves in the ‘Road Map’ type of approach to the

identification of second & third order effect. The basic idea is to account for the project



activity & identify the type of impact that could initially occur followed by the

identification of secondary and tertiary impact.The project will have impacts of varying

magnitude on different environmental components. These impacts could be categorized

as -

Primary impacts, i.e. impacts which occur as a direct result of the project

activities.

Secondary and tertiary impacts, i.e. impacts that occur as a result of primary

impacts.

4.2.1 Identification of Impacting Activities

Various activities involved in the project are divided viz.:

A. Construction phase activities: impacts are immediate, in the vicinity and sporadic

B. Operation phase activities: impacts are long term, in wide area and continuous

The activities identified for the project under each phase are:

Construction phase

Excavation

Foundation & Civil work

Transportation of construction materials, equipments& machineries

Installation of equipments& machineries

Operation phase

Plant operation

Material storage & handling

Utilities and services

4.2.2 Identification of Environment Attributes

There are various types of impacts that arise due to the proposed activities which will

be evaluated considering the following environment parameters in construction and

operational phase,

Impact on Topography

Impact on Air Environment

Impact on Water Environment

Impact on Noise Environment

Impact on Land Environment (Hazardous/solid waste generation)

Impact on Biological Environment

Impact on Socio-Economic Environment

Impact on Occupational Health & Safety



4.3 IMPACT ON TOPOGRAPHY

Proposed activities at Genext Steels Pvt. Ltd. (Henceforth Genext) will be carried out

in the new premises at survey nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822 & 1823, Vill: Bagodara,

Tehsil: Bavla, Dist: Ahmedabad. Proposed land is already converted from agriculture to

non-agriculture for industrial purpose. Land document showing status of non-

agriculture land is attached as Annexure-IV. During the construction, excavated soil

will be restored to its original shape. Thus, the impact during the construction is

reversible, short term and insignificant. During the operational phase of the project, no

major impact is envisaged on the topography.

4.4 IMPACT ON AIR ENVIRONMENT

a. Construction Phase impact & mitigation measures

During construction phase, there will be chances of dust generation due to the

construction activities to be carried out as per the plant design. These emissions are

expected to result in change in baseline air quality, primarily in the working area only.

It will not likely to spread in wider area. To mitigate the impact, regular sprinkling of

the water will be done.

Vehicular traffic may lead to increased concentration of pollutants through exhaust

gases, affecting the ambient air quality of surrounding areas. Only PUC certified vehicles

will be allowed. However, this effect remains localized near to the plant site and during

the time of vehicular movement only. Thus, overall impact is envisaged as short-term,

negative and reversible in nature. Hence, looking to the overall facts described above, it

can be concluded that, the impacts on air due to the construction & erection activities

will be minimum or negligible.

b. Operational phase impact & mitigation measures

Long term impacts on the air quality are anticipated due to operational activities. It

depends on various factors like process technology, operation & maintenance, raw

material, fuel, air pollution control measures. For the study of impact assessment for air

environment, all probable emissions are studied including fugitive emission. The

sources of impacts and mitigation measures are described in below section.

Emission from the point source (Stack)

In the proposed steel plant, flue gas emission will be from stacks attached with pellet

plant, stacks of DRI kiln, Induction furnace, FBC boiler where Dolochar (by products of

DRI kiln) & imported coal will be used as a fuel. Other emission source will be standby

D.G. sets. HSD will be used as fuel, which will be used on in case of emergency, the flue



gas emission from D.G. set will be discharged at height as per standards. Estimated

emission levels are tabulated in Table 4.1.

Fugitive emission

Fugitive emissions are expected during storage, handling and conveying of coal, iron

ore and other raw materials. Dust will be generated during loading and unloading,

transportation of material through conveyors, crushing and screening operations of

these products. Fugitiveemission will also be generated due to vehicular movement in

the premises.

Mitigation Measures

Unit will provide dust suction system to control fugitive emission generated from

melting of scrap.

Unit will provide dust suppression system (water sprinklers) in coal unloading

area & transfer points of material handling.

Bag filter will be provided for the extraction of dust particles to the stack attached

with induction furnace.

Continuous casting operation is selected for the production of billets.


dust during conveying.

Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) will be provided to bring down the PM to 50

mg/Nm3 for DRI plant and 30 mg/Nm3 for power plant.

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only.

All the internal roads will be paved/concreted.

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant.

4.4.1 Air Pollution Dispersion Modeling of stack

Following sub-section give air dispersion modeling details for prediction of changes in

GLC of pollutants emitted from the above stacks.

Objectives: The objective of dispersion modeling is to predict the GLC of pollutants

during the operation of the project and its impact on ambient air quality of the area

concentrations and compare with applicable NAAQS.

Model used: The impact on air quality due to emissions from single source or group of

sources is evaluated by using mathematical models. The impacts of air pollutants were

predicted usingGaussian air dispersion model, which is selected on the basis of

existence of multiple point sources within the industrial complex and the plain terrain

at the project site. In order to predict the impact of air pollutants on ambient air quality,



ISCST3 model (Industrial Source Complex – Short Term dispersion model) of United

State Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) was used by considering guidelines

stipulated by CPCB for air pollution dispersion modeling. The Gaussian model provides

estimates of pollutant concentrations at various receptor locations.

It is an hour-by-hour steady state Gaussian model which takes into account the

following:

Terrain adjustments

Stack-tip downwash

Gradual plume rise

Buoyancy-induced dispersion, and

Plume reflection off elevated terrain

Building down wash

Partial penetration of elevated inversions is accounted for Hourly source

emission rates, exit velocity and stack gas temperature

Only two stability conditions based on the meteorology aspects were used to calculate

the theoretical maximum ground level concentration to compare the actual data and

data generated from mathematical modeling, it highlights that the stability condition E

& A-Bwere predominant in the region.

Following are the assumptions made while using the model:

- No dry and wet depletion of pollutants

- Receptors are on flat terrain

4.4.2 Model Input data

Emission

Stack emissions data have been used for prediction of incremental GLC values of PM,

SO2, NOx. Emission data from various stacks are given in Table 4.1.

Receptor Network

Uniform polar grid and ambient air monitoring locations are considered as discrete

Cartesian receptor network for entire study area of 10 km radius.

Meteorological data

Hourly micrometeorological data collected during the study period (Jan, 2018 to

March, 2018) have been used for modeling. The hourly wind speed, wind direction are

collected at site. Data of solar insolation, total cloud cover were collected from IMD

department. These data use for determination of the hourly atmospheric stability

classes (defined by Pasquill and Gifford as A to F, A being most unstable and F being



most stable). Mixing heights published in ‘Spatial distribution of hourly mixing depths

over Indian region’ by CPCB have been used for site specific mixing heights.

4.4.3 Output of the model

The 24-hourly average GLC values from the proposed project have been computed for

PM, SO2, NOx considering topographical features around the plant & applicable stability

classes. The maximum 50 (24-hr) average concentration values for PM, SO2, NOx are

given in Table 4.3 to 4.5. Corresponding Isopleths for 24-hourly predicted value for

proposed scenario is generated which is shown in Figure 4.1 to 4.3.

From the computed result,obtained highest 24-hourly average GLCs values for PM, SO2,

NOxfrom the proposed activity are 11.741g/m3, 8.423g/m3 and 7.842g/m3

respectively. These GLCs are expected to occur at a distance of 1.0 km from the source

in S direction.With this marginal contribution due to the proposal of the project, the

levels of PM, SO2&NOx will remain well below the 24-hourly ambient air quality

standards for SO2&NOx (80 g/m3), PM10 (100 g/m3)prescribed by CPCB.

4.4.4 Incremental & cumulative concentration of pollutants

The maximum incremental GLCs due to the proposed project for SPM, SO2, NOxis

superimposed on the baseline concentrations recorded during the study period to

arrive at the likely resultant concentrations after implementation of the proposed plant.

The cumulative concentrations (baseline + incremental) of the project is tabulated at

Table 4.2.

4.4.5 Conclusion

The modeling study proved that, the air emissions from the proposed activities would

not likely to cause any significant impact on the ambient air quality of the study area.

This is because the proposed plant will have highly efficient air pollution control

equipment to control the emissions. The ambient air quality around project site will

remain within the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) prescribed for

residential area.

4.5 IMPACT ON WATER ENVIRONMENT

The main sources of impact on water environment will be due to withdrawal of fresh

water from the ground during construction and operation phase. These are discussed

below:

a. Construction Phase impacts & mitigation measures

During construction work, water requirement is estimated to be about 50 KLD

depending upon nature of construction work and it will be satisfied from bore well. In



addition to this, about 5-8 KLD water will be required for domestic activities of the

construction staff which will also be met through the same source. There will be no

major wastewater generation from the construction work. Hence, it can be concluded

that there will be no adverse impact during construction phase.

b. Operational Phase impacts & mitigation measures

Water requirement

Total water requirement for the proposed project will be 1018 KLD; out of which 905

KLD will be fresh water requirement &113 KLD will be recycle/treated water. This

includes make-up water for pellet plant, DRI Kiln, Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill,

Power Plant. Domestic water requirement will be 25 KLD.Water required for the

proposed project will be sourced from Ground Water (Borewell).

Wastewater generation


will be no effluent generation from pellet plant, DRI plant, Induction Furnace & Rolling

mill as closed circuit cooling system will be adopted. Effluent from power plant (boiler

blow down & cooling bleed off) & reject of water treatment will be treated in ETP and

after achieving SPCB norms, part of the effluent will be directly reused for slag cooling

and part of it will be passed through RO. RO reject will be taken to Multi Effect

Evaporator (MEE). RO permeate and condensate of MEE will be reused in utility. Thus,

unit proposed to achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD).Sewage (20 KLD) will be treated

in STP and utilized for green belt development.

The details of water consumption and wastewater generation are depicted in Table

2.6. Water balance diagram is given in Figure 2.6.

c. Impact Assessment

As fresh water will be extracted from ground, there will be significant impact on the

ground water table. However, it will be balanced by recharging ground water during

the monsoon season by collecting rain water from the plant area and adjacent area and

recharged to the aquifer. Detailed calculation of rain water harvesting is given in

Annexure-VI.Rain water harvesting pits will be installed to recharge the ground water.

The depth of ground water table will certainly increase due to rain water recharging.

Hence there will not be any adverse impact on water environment due to the proposed

project.

Mitigation Measures:

Minimum use of water will be done for construction phase.



Maximum use of treated water during operational phase.

Regular maintenance of rain water harvesting system shall be undertaken to have

effective recharge.

4.6 IMPACT ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Any unwanted sound that creates disturbance in hearing is termed as Noise. Hence, it is

important to assess the present noise quality of the area in order to predict the

potential impact of future noise levels due to the project.

a. Construction Phase Impact & mitigation measures

During the construction phase, the major sources of noise generation are civil works

such as trenching, foundation, mechanical works, loading & unloading activities,

installation of new equipments/ machineries construction equipment like dozers,

scrapers, concrete mixer, cranes, generators, compressors, vibrators etc. as well as

some impact due to vehicular movements. The operation of these equipments will

generate noise ranging between 70-85 dB(A). The noise produced during the

construction will have significant impact on the existing ambient noise levels. The

construction equipment has high noise levels which can affect the personnel

operatingthe machines.

However, the exposure of construction labor and supervisors to this high noise levels

will be fora short time only and hence will not pose any health hazards. Also, since the

populated areasare away from the proposed site, these noise levels are considered to

have insignificant impact.Overall, the impact of generated noise on the environment

will be insignificant, reversible andlocal in nature and mainly confined to the day

hours.Major construction work will be carried during the day time. Further, workers

working in the highnoise areas will be provided with necessary protective devices like

ear plug, ear-muffs etc.Regular maintenance & lubrication of machineries will be

undertaken to reduce the noise generation.

b. Operational Phase Impact & mitigation measures

During the operation phase, main sources of noise within the plants are: operation of

furnaces, boiler, EMS, process plant, etc. and material handling systems. The noise

anticipated from the project will be confined only within plant boundary. Suitable noise

control system will be provided in conformity with ISO 3746. All the equipments for the

project will be designed/ operated in such a way that the noise level in work place shall

not exceed 85 dB(A) as per the criteria enforced by OSHA (Occupation Safety and

Health Administration).



The results of baseline monitoring carried out in the region are presented in Chapter-3.

The results are below the standards prescribed for Industrial environment. It can be

concluded that, the impact on noise environment will be long term but

insignificant.However, proper noise preventive measures have been taken to minimize

the noise pollution like ear plugs, dampers to the furnace, efficient silencers to the

vehicles, etc.

Mitigation measures:

Adequate oiling & lubrication will be done to reduce noise generation.

PPEs like ear plug & ear muff will be provided to workers working in high noise

area.

Silencers, anti-vibration pad, acoustic enclosure to equipment will be provided.

The air compressor, process air blower, boiler, turbine inlet will be provided with

acoustic enclosure;

Design/installation precautions will be taken as specified by the manufacturers

with respect to noise control and will be strictly adhered.

Housing/casing will be provided for all noise generating machines.

Periodic maintenance of machinery and vehicles shall be undertaken.

Adequate greenbelt will be developed in the plant premises which will serve as

the efficient barrier and result in prevention of noise propagation outside plant

premises.

Thus, impact on the environment during the operation phase will be long term but,

insignificant quantitatively.

4.7 IMPACT ON LAND ENVIRONMENT

The main source of impact on land and soil environment will be due to construction

activities and hazardous waste disposal.

a. Construction Phase Impact & mitigation measures

The construction activities like excavation, clearing, foundation, leveling & vehicular

movements will entail change in the landscape, which are expected to be of short

duration and insignificant. Unit will provide sanitation facilities for the staff engaged in

construction work which will prevent the impacts on land. Thus, there will not be any

issue of impacts on land during the construction phase.

b. Operational Phase impact (Solid&Hazardous Waste)

During the operation phase, it is identified that the impacts on land would occur due to

the contamination by solid&hazardous wastes. The hazardous wastes are the major



source of impacts on land. Hazardous waste generation from project must be

considered to identify the potential impacts. At Genext, entire quantity of the

solid&hazardous waste will be stored in the isolated hazardous waste storage area

within premises having impervious platform with RCC floor, roof cover & leachate

collection system and disposed as per the scientific method.

Main source of hazardous waste generation will be ETP sludge, MEE salt, Used Oil, and

Discarded Drums/containers. ETP sludge & MEE salt will be disposed to approved

TSDF site for landfilling. Used oil will be sold to registered re-processors. Discarded

drums/containers will be sold to registered recyclers. The unit will provide isolated

area with impervious flooring & roof cover for the storage of hazardous waste. Entire

quantity of hazardous waste will be handled & disposed as per Hazardous & Other

waste (Management &Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.


The solid wastes generation includes fly ash, Dolochar, Mill scales and slag. Ash will be

sold to brick manufacturing units. Dolochar will be used in FBC power plant as

fuel/brick manufacturing. Slag after crushing and iron removal, used in road

construction/brick manufacturing. Mill scales will be reused in the Pellet Plant.

Details of all solid&hazardous waste and its disposal methods are given in Table 2.11.

Hence, there will be no adverse impact on the land environment likely to occur, and no

significant negative impact is envisaged on the surrounding soil quality.

4.8 IMPACT ON BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

a. Construction phase impact & mitigation measures

This is a Greenfield project; hence minor cutting of trees/shrubs will be done to clean

the area. However, it will be balanced by developing greenbelt within premises and

along the roads. Various trees, shrubs and herbs are found in and around it, a list of

which is given in baseline. None of the plants are in the list of endangered plant species.

Also, the trees are identified for their sensitivity & pollution tolerance capacity. This

concept helps to plan the greenbelt of the area making it less polluted and a pollution

absorber. Thus, it is envisaged that there will not be any adverse impacts on the

biological environment in construction phase.

b. Operational phase impact & mitigation measures

There are no protected areas like national park/wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km

radial of the project site, so there will not be any significant impact on ecology. No

endangered floral or faunal species has been recorded within the study area. Further,



unit will develop greenbelt to enhance the biological feature of the site. Also, the trees

are identified for their sensitivity & pollution tolerance capacity.

Following is the list of trees which are helpful as pollution absorber and at the same

time pollution sensitive.

Family Name Botanical Name Common

Name

Sensitive Tolerant

Anacardiaceae Mangiferaindica Mango Cement dust,

Coal dust, SO2

Dust collector

Anonaceae Polyalthialongifolia Asopalav SO2 Dust collector

Caesalpini-aceae Cassia fistula Garmalo Cement dust,

Poor Dust

collector, SO2

N.A

Delonixregia Gulmohar SO2, Fly ash,

Cement dust

N.A

Meliaceae Azadirachtaindica Neem Cement dust SO2

Mimosaceae Pithecellobiumdulce Gorasamli N.A Better Dust

collector, SO2

There will not be discharge of effluent from Genext, and entire quantity of hazardous

waste will be handled & disposed as per Hazardous & Other waste (Management

&Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. Hence there will not be any impact on

aquatic ecology of the surrounding area. GLCs of air pollutants will remain low and

hence no significant impact on terrestrial ecology is expected. Thus, there will not be

any significant impact on ecological environment due to proposed activities.

4.9 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

a. Construction Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

The construction phase induces employment opportunities for the local people. To the

maximum extent possible, construction workers will be employed from within the

study area. Around 150-200 workers will be employed in the construction work. This

will increase construction employment in the study area. The dwelling of construction

workers at thesite may cause sanitation and other problems. As the villages are nearby

and staying facilitiesare readily available in these villages, the construction workers

may not be required to stay atthe project site. Safety and health care of workers is also

an important factor to be consideredduring construction phase. Constructional and

occupational safetymeasures will be adopted during construction phase of the

industry.As the construction phase for the proposed project will be of few months, the

impact would be temporary. Unskilled labour will become semi-skilled and semi-skilled

will become skilled ones. A construction force will be created.



b. Operation Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

The proposed unit will be located in private land, so no displacement of person is

envisaged. Unit will provide employment opportunity to locally available skilled and

un-skilled labours at different level as per the requirement, which in turn result into a

positive impact on prevailing socio-economic environment. For the proposed activities,

500-700nos. of workers will be employed. In addition, employment will be generated

by the secondary supporting activities e.g. transportation, communication, daily utility

services providers. Surrounding area has got good educational facilities and most of

employees will come from the surrounding area. Thus, overall impacts on socio-

economic environment are long term and positive in nature. Many ancillary industries

will be erected for supplying, repair and maintenance components.

4.10 IMPACT ON OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY

a. Construction Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

In the Construction phase, some effects on occupational health &safety of the

employees working in the site are envisaged. Major health issues encountered will be

physical hazards & accidental Hazard. All plans and construction schedule will be

followed as per relevant laws approved by competent authority, so as to minimize the

occupational health hazards.

Mitigation Measures

Necessary PPEs like helmets, ear plug/ear muff, safety shoes, goggles etc. will be

provided to workers.

Incident/accident reporting system will be developed and all the employees will

be made aware for the same.

Periodic inspection & testing of equipments& machineries will be done.

People working at height will be provided with safety belts and other protective

gears.

b. Operational Phase Impacts & mitigation measures

In operational phase, various effects on occupational health and safety of the employees

working in the plant are envisaged. Major health and safety issues encountered will be

physical hazards, respiratory hazards, electrical hazards, noise, fire hazards associated

while working within the plant. Preventive safety measures shall be taken to minimize

the risk of accident.

Mitigation Measures

Emergency preparedness plan should be implemented.



First aid/other emergency treatment should be provided.

Workers shall be well equipped with personal protective equipments. Only

authorized persons will be allowed inside the plant.

A health monitoring program shall be in place to monitor the health of the

persons working on the site to ensure the health status of all concerned.

Fire hydrant system, fire extinguishers will be installed at different locations

within premises.

Sign boards will be displayed at designated locations indicating appropriate

hazard warnings.

Good house-keeping will be ensured within the factory premises.

4.11 PREDICTION OF IMPACT DUE TO VEHICULAR MOVEMENT

Raw materials, products & wastes will be transported in covered trucks by road.

Avenue plantation will be developed on both sides of village road leading to the plant

site.The traffic load is to be increased due to proposed project for the transportation of

finished goods and raw materials.

Baseline/ Existing Traffic Scenario & Level of Services

The road from Bagodara-Rajkot-Bagodara is four lane road with divider (two ways) and

all types of vehicles move on the road.

Capacity of road as per IRC = 3600 PCU’s/hr.

Total Volume during Peak Hours = 2113 PCU’s/hr

(Section 3.14 &Table 3.27 – Chapter 3)

Existing Volume/Capacity ratio = 2113/3600

= 0.587

The Existing level of service is “C” that is good but near to Fair

Traffic Scenario & Level of Services: During Construction

During construction phase, local labors of around 150-200 will be employed. Additional

traffic from proposed project construction will be,

(i) estimated10 trucks/tanker per hour or 35 PCU/hr and

(ii) three to four cars estimated per hour or 4 PCU/hr.

Total volume during peak hours during construction of the project

= existing during peak hours + additional due to construction

= 2113 + 35 + 4

= 2152 PCU/hr.

Volume/Capacity ratio during construction = 2152/3600



= 0.597

The level of service is “C” that is good but near to Fair

Traffic Scenario & Level of Services: During operational level

Additional traffic from proposed project operation will be,

Purpose Numbers of vehicles per day

PCU/day PCU/day (total in and out movement)

PCU/hr (total)

a b = a x average PCU c = b x 2 d = c/24

Trucks for raw materials transport

135 trucks/tankers per day

472.5 (135 x 3.5)

945 (647.5 x 2)

39.4

car and motorcycle

100 PCU/day 200 8.3

Trucks for finished materials transport

50 trucks/tankers per day (1000 TPD production/ 20 ton per truck)

175 (50 x 3.5)

350 (175 x 2)

14.6

Total 1495 62.3

Total volume during peak hours during operation of the project

= existing during peak hours + additional due to operation

= 2113 + 62.3

= 2175.3 PCU/hr.

Volume/Capacity ratio during construction = 2175.3/3600

= 0.604

The level of service is “D” that is Fair.

Conclusion:

The methodology adopted for carrying out the traffic study was to select the major

roads around the project site and count the various categories of vehicles moving on

these roads. The traffic survey was carried out on the approach road to the proposed

project from the national highway NH-8A. From the study it is observed that there will

be no major impact on traffic due to the proposed project. Additionally, six lane road

constructions are in progress which will lead to improved Level of Service.

PCU/hr

Baseline/ Existing

During Construction

During Operation

Capacity of road as per 3600 3600 3600



IRC

Additional traffic -- 39 62.3

Total Volume during Peak Hours

2113 2152 2175.3

Existing Volume/ Capacity ratio

0.587 0.597 0.604

Level of service C (Good) ~ D (Fair)

C (Good) ~ D (Fair)

D (Fair)



Table 4.1

Input data for air quality modeling

Sr.

No.

Stack attached to Stack Height

(m)

Temp.

(0k)

Velocity

(m/s)

Dia.

(m)

Concentration (g/s)

PM SO2 NOX

1 Pellet Plant, Kiln-1 31.0 373 5.5 1.00 0.130 0.151 0.130




5 D G Set (300 kVA x 4

nos.) (Stand by)

11.0

each

453 15.0 0.30 0.058 0.026 0.037

6 Rotary Kiln-1 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382

7 Rotary Kiln-2 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382

8 Rotary Kiln-3 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382

9 Rotary Kiln-4 48.0 423 5.0 1.80 0.382 0.445 0.382

10 D G Set (750 kVA x 4

nos.) (Stand by)

15.0

each

453 15.0 0.375 0.091 0.041 0.058

11 Induction furnace-1 30.0 373 5.5 1.00 0.151 -- --




15 D G Set (300 kVA x 4

nos.) (Stand by)

11.0

each

453 15.0 0.300 0.058 0.026 0.037

16 WHRB boiler 75.0 423 7.5 2.00 0.589 1.060 0.942

17 FBC Boiler 30.0 423 7.5 1.20 0.382 0.382 0.339

18 Vent of process area

cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-1,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --


cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-2,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --


cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-3,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --


cleaning for Rotary

Kiln-4,

5 Nos.

11.0

each

373 5.0 0.450 0.028 -- --



Table 4.2

Cumulative Concentrations at various locations

Station Direction Dist. (Km)

Baseline Concentration

(g/m3)

Predicted GLC (g/m3)

Cumulative Concentration

(g/m3)

PM SO2 NOx PM SO2 NOx PM SO2 NOx

Project site (A1) -- 0.0 64.9 13.6 19.6 5.0 1.5 1.5 69.90 15.10 21.10

Bagodra (A2) ENE (UW) 3.29 67.6 14.4 16.2 1.0 1.5 1.5 68.60 15.90 17.70

Sarala (A3) NE (UW) 5.57 66.4 11.9 14.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 66.40 11.90 14.40

Rohika (A4) ENE (UW) 7.84 73.4 15.8 16.6 1.0 0.75 0.0 74.40 16.55 16.60

Shiyal (A5) N (UW) 6.22 65.4 12.7 17.4 4.0 3.0 3.0 69.40 15.70 20.40

Gundanapara (A6) SE (DW) 3.52 66.5 13.3 16.1 2.0 1.5 1.5 68.50 14.80 17.60

Mithapur (A7) WSW (DW) 4.08 65.4 12.8 15.5 2.0 2.25 2.25 67.40 15.05 17.75

Jansali (A8) SW (DW) 6.20 59.7 10.9 13.6 2.0 1.5 1.5 61.70 12.40 15.10

National Ambient Air Quality Standards 100 80 80



Table 4.3The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SPM

RANK CONC RECEPTOR (XR,YR) TYPE RANK CONC RECEPTOR (XR,YR) TYPE

1 11.741 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 26 6.944 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

2 11.673 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 27 6.941 ( .00, 3000.00) GC

3 11.260 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 28 6.827 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC

4 10.642 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 29 6.805 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

5 10.549 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 30 6.706 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

6 10.056 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 31 6.689 ( -3000.00, -3000.00) GC

7 9.273 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 32 6.643 ( .00, -3000.00) GC

8 9.039 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 33 6.608 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

9 9.024 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 34 6.437 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

10 8.973 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 35 6.369 ( 2000.00, -2000.00) GC

11 8.872 ( .00, 1000.00) GC 36 6.351 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

12 8.763 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 37 6.226 ( .00, 4000.00) GC

13 8.667 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 38 6.209 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

14 8.476 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 39 6.107 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

15 8.212 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 40 6.073 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

16 7.949 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 41 6.049 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

17 7.922 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 42 5.997 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

18 7.852 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 43 5.946 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

19 7.833 ( .00, 2000.00) GC 44 5.918 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

20 7.591 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 45 5.810 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

21 7.495 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC 46 5.785 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC

22 7.395 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 47 5.777 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

23 7.114 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 48 5.763 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

24 7.102 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 49 5.730 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

25 7.080 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 50 5.662 ( .00, -1000.00) GC

Note: Receptor Types: GC = Grid cart, Concentration in µg/m3



Table 4.4The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for SO2


1 8.423 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 26 5.276 ( -3000.00, -3000.00) GC

2 8.305 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 27 5.222 ( .00, 2000.00) GC

3 7.700 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 28 5.083 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

4 7.151 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 29 5.034 ( .00, -3000.00) GC

5 6.945 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 30 5.012 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC

6 6.762 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 31 4.925 ( .00, 3000.00) GC

7 6.644 (-1000.00, -1000.00) GC 32 4.899 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

8 6.604 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 33 4.890 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

9 6.588 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 34 4.859 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

10 6.485 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 35 4.767 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

11 6.150 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 36 4.750 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

12 6.100 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 37 4.708 ( 2000.00, -2000.00) GC

13 6.078 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 38 4.667 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

14 5.872 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 39 4.656 ( .00, 4000.00) GC

15 5.786 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 40 4.649 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

16 5.710 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 41 4.590 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

17 5.645 ( .00, -4000.00) GC 42 4.536 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

18 5.625 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 43 4.527 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

19 5.585 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC 44 4.498 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

20 5.579 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 45 4.485 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

21 5.542 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 46 4.458 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

22 5.444 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 47 4.401 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC

23 5.418 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC 48 4.363 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

24 5.375 ( .00, 1000.00) GC 49 4.356 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

25 5.292 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 50 4.311 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC




Table 4.5The 24-hourly average GLC Concentration Values for NOx


1 7.842 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 26 4.820 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

2 7.835 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 27 4.758 ( -3000.00, -3000.00) GC

3 7.077 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 28 4.747 ( 1000.00, -1000.00) GC

4 6.754 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 29 4.632 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

5 6.572 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 30 4.578 ( .00, -3000.00) GC

6 6.328 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 31 4.537 ( .00, 3000.00) GC

7 6.181 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 32 4.403 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

8 6.074 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 33 4.401 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC

9 5.975 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 34 4.368 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

10 5.917 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC 35 4.360 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

11 5.704 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 36 4.326 ( -2000.00, -2000.00) GC

12 5.675 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 37 4.308 ( 2000.00, -2000.00) GC

13 5.650 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 38 4.238 ( .00, 4000.00) GC

14 5.543 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC 39 4.194 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

15 5.364 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 40 4.159 ( .00, -5000.00) GC

16 5.224 ( .00, -1000.00) GC 41 4.129 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

17 5.201 ( .00, -2000.00) GC 42 4.123 ( .00, -2000.00) GC

18 5.179 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 43 4.114 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

19 5.123 ( .00, 1000.00) GC 44 4.089 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

20 5.103 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 45 4.084 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

21 5.085 ( .00, -4000.00) GC 46 4.003 ( -1000.00, -1000.00) GC

22 5.043 ( .00, -3000.00) GC 47 3.992 ( -1000.00, .00) GC

23 5.006 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC 48 3.948 ( 5000.00, -2000.00) GC

24 4.895 ( .00, 2000.00) GC 49 3.937 ( .00, -4000.00) GC

25 4.858 ( -5000.00, -2000.00) GC 50 3.885 ( .00, -2000.00) GC




Figure 4.1: Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SPM



Figure 4.2: Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for SO2



Figure 4.3: Isopleths for Ground Level Concentrations for NOx



Chapter-5

Analysis of Alternatives

5.1 PROLOGUE

Alternative analysis is the process of analyzing the proposed location for suitability for

basic necessities to operate the plant safely and for any alternate technology. This

analysis also covers the environmental aspect of pollution prevention and

improvement in quality of life in the project vicinity. The project alternative is the

course of action in place of another, that would meet the same purpose and need, but

which would avoid or minimize negative impacts and enhance project benefits. Such

projects may result in specific impacts which can be avoided or mitigated by adherence

to certain predetermined performance standards, guidelines or design criteria.

Alternative approaches may therefore be more effective in integrating environmental

and social concerns into the project planning process.

5.2 SITE ALTERNATIVE

Alternative sites examined for the proposed project

The following three alternative sites have been considered for the proposed steel plant

before finalize the site.

Description Site-1 Site-2 Site-3

Location (Village) Bagodara Shiyal Kothatalavdi

Geographical Coordinates 22°37'35.22"N 72° 9'48.72"E

22°41'47.77"N 72° 9'40.61"E

22°39'40.13"N 72° 4'43.94"E

Areas falling under the critically polluted areas (within 10 Kms. Radius)

No No No

National Parks/Wildlife Sanctuaries/Bird Sanctuaries/Tiger reserve/Elephant corridors/Migratory routes for Birds/Forest (within 10 Kms. of the project site)

Nalsarovar Bird sanctuary 12.0 Kms



Sensitive Areas with 10 Kms. radius of the site

Outside the ESZ Nalsarovar Bird sanctuary

- 7.84 Kms and falling in Ecosentive

Zone

Nalsarovar Bird sanctuary

- 4.5 Kms and falling in

Ecosentive Zone

Land Use

Land use pattern Agriculture non irrigated land

Agriculture land irrigated land

Agriculture land irrigated land

Number of habitable structures within site

None None None

Number of habitable None 2 structures in 5 structures in



structures within 0.5 km radius from the project boundary

agriculture farm agriculture farm

Numbers village within 1 km radius from the project boundary

None None None

Numbers village within 2.5 km radius from the project boundary

None 2 villages 2 villages

Number of schools within 1.0 km of site

None One primary school

One primary school

Land Availability

Ranked based on availability of barren/ waste/un-irrigated lands

Private Agriculture land purchased from farmer with market rate

Non irrigated land

No rehabilitation or resettlement

Irrigated lands Irrigated lands

Transport – Ranked on the ease of accessibility and networking of Roads, Rail, Air, Waterways along with logistic centers and connectivity to port

Easy accessibility of road network, Around 50.0 km from Ahmedabad a Metropolitan city with national and international connectivity for business by Rail, Air etc. Kandla port Waterways connectivity for import/export of raw materials and products.



Proximity to from raw material source and market)

Ship breaking yard “Alang” Bhavnagar a major RM source far 135 km far from the project site.

Ship braking yard “Alang” Bhavnagar a major RM source far 138 km far from the project site.

Ship braking yard “Alang” Bhavnagar a major RM source far 140 km far from the project site.

Infrastructure – Ranked on basis of safe ground water blocks

Area falls under the safe zone as per the CGWA classification.

Area falls under the safe Zone as per the CGWA classification.

Area falls under the safe Zone as per the CGWA classification.

Based on above, Site # 1 at Bagodara Village has been selected for the proposed project.

Major criteria for selection of this site are:

No forest land involved and land is converted into non-agriculture activity



No Religious and Historic Places or Archaeological Monuments within 10 km radius

from the project site (Nearest Archaeological Monument - Lothal is 15.0 km from

the project site).

Other required facilities like infrastructure, communication, medical facilities,

unskilled & skilled manpower, fuel, water, power, and raw materials, are readily

available, too.

No prime agricultural land converted into industrial site (Proposed Land yields poor

agriculture productivities).

Land area is sufficiently large to provide space for appropriate EMS.

No Major settlements within 25 km radius from the project site.

The site boundary is approachable at about 523.45 m from Ahmedabad- Rajkot

Highway (NH-8A).

Therefore, the present site fulfills all the basic requirements of the proposed industry

and the statutory requirement of the MoEF&CC and hence this site is considered.

5.3 PROCESS ALTERNATIVE

The manufacturing technology inter alia include manufacturing of pellets through

rotary kilns/travelling Grate; manufacturing of Sponge Iron through Rotary kilns;

manufacturing of MS Billets through Induction Furnace (IF) along with concast;

manufacturing of Structural Steel, TMT bars & Rolled products through continuous

Rolling Mill; power generation through WHRB & FBC Boiler.

Above integrated plant technology will be helpful to conserve around 30% of energy by

way of direct hot material/mass transfer from one process to another process. Waste

Heat will be utilized for power generations which also reduce fuel cost around 25%.

Manufacturing technologies for all the units proposed in the project are well proven

technologies all over the world.

There will not be any risk of technological failures from this plant. Additionally, it

involves minimized handling of raw materials and high rate of energy conservation.

Hence, no alternative technologies are considered better for the present, for an

integrated steel plant.



Chapter-6

Environmental Monitoring Programme

6.1 PRELUDE

Environment monitoring is the sampling and analysis tool to know the environment

conditions at particular time. The record of environmental monitoring is most

important as the environmental changes are slow in nature and impact appears after

many years. Environmental Monitoring is the technical heart of assessment of

environmental and social impacts arising due to implementation of the proposed

project. An equally essential element of this process is to develop measures to

eliminate, offset or reduce impacts to acceptable levels during implementation and

operation of projects. The integration of such measures into project implementation

and operation is supported by clearly defining the environmental requirements within

an Environmental Management Plan.

Genext Steels Private Limited proposes to set up mini integrated steel plant at

Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist. Ahmedabad, Gujarat. The environmental

monitoring programme is developed as below.

6.2 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAM

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise, soil and

performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are vital for

proper Environmental management of any industrial project. Therefore, the company

shall create environmental monitoring facilities by the environmental and safety

department to monitor air and water pollutants as per the guideline of GPCB & CPCB.

Moreover, air and water quality shall be monitored by outside agencies authorized by

GPCB at regular frequencies. This department shall also carry out periodical checkup of

fire and safety equipments.

6.3 OBJECTIVE OF MONITORING PLAN

The basic objective of implementing a monitoring plan on a regular basis is as follows:

To know the pollution status within the plant and its vicinity.

Generate data for corrective action in respect of pollution.

Correlate the production operations with emission & control mechanism.

Examine the performance of pollution control system.

Assess the Environmental impacts.

Remedial measures and environment management plan reverse the impacts.



6.4 SCHEDULE FOR ENVIRONMENT MONITORING

The environmental monitoring will be scheduled on regular interval to assess the

conditions. The record of these monitoring will be compared with the baseline study to

know the changes in environmental conditions. The post-project environmental

monitoring suggested herewith should be as per the following guideline.

The highlights of the integrated environmental monitoring plan are:

The stack monitoring facilities like ladder, platform and porthole at all the stacks

will be maintained in good condition.

Regular monitoring of all gaseous emissions from stacks/vents.

The performance of air pollution control equipment evaluated based on these

monitoring results.

Water consumption will be recorded daily.

As far as possible, noise curbed at its source, with the help of acoustic hoods and

other such noise reducing equipment. Regular noise level monitoring will be

carried out to ascertain the same.

Greenbelt will be properly maintained and new plantation programmes will be

undertaken frequently.

Continuous environmental awareness programmes will be carried out for the

employees and also in the surrounding villages.

6.5 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

Ambient air quality will be monitored with respect to NOx, SO2, Particulate Matter

(PM10 and PM2.5) at least 3-5 locations in and around the project site through a reputed

environmental laboratory recognized by MoEF&CC/NABL. Monitoring will be carried

out for a period of 24 hours, every month. Emission from the D.G. sets is maintained &

monitored according to standard & used only in power failure condition.

6.6 WASTEWATER MONITORING

Monitoring of wastewater shall cover all the parameters specified by GPCB, with special

emphasis on pH, suspended solids, Dissolve Oxygen, Oil and Grease, COD, BOD etc. and

shall be carried out by a laboratory accredited by MoEF&CC/NABL. Ground water

monitoring locations will be identified and periodically checked for the physical,

chemical as well as biological parameters as per drinking water standard IS:10500.

6.7 AMBIENT NOISE LEVEL MONITORING

Monitoring of the noise level is essential to assess the effectiveness of Environmental

Management Plan implemented to reduce noise levels. A good quality sound level meter



and noise exposure meter may be procured for the same. Audiometric tests shall be

conducted periodically for the employees working close to the high noise sources.

The proposed environmental monitoring program during both construction and

operation phases are given in following table:

Table: 6.1 Environment Monitoring Plan

Sr. No.

Component Location Parameters Frequency

Construction Phase

1 Ambient air quality At boundary of construction site

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO Once in a month

2 Ground water quality (used as source of domestic water)

Point of abstraction Parameters listed in IS:10500

Once in a month

3 Construction Waste Construction site Quantity/volume generated and disposed

Once in a day

4 Ambient Noise Levels

Boundary of Construction site

Ambient noise levels (Leqday & Leqnight)

Once in a month

5 Stack emission Characteristics

Stacks attached to emission sources (including DG sets)

PM, SO2, NOx Once in a month

Operational Phase

1 Ambient air quality 3-5 stations in and around project covering upwind & down-wind direction

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO Once in a month

2 Ground water Quality

3 locations nearby project site in different directions

Parameters listed in IS:10500

Once in 3 months

3 Effluent quality 2-3 samples pH, TDS, SS, COD, BOD, Oil & Grease, etc.

Once in a month

4 Ambient Noise Noise level monitoring in dB(A) near noise generating equipments

Ambient noise levels (Leq day & Leq night)

Once in a month

5 Greenbelt development

Plant density, health, growth and survival rate at site

Plant density, health, growth and survival rate in additional greenbelt development

Continuous Greenbelt management

6 Work zone fugitive monitoring

10-12 locations where high generation of fugitive emission.

Dust Once in a month

7 Health check-up of workers

All workers --- As per the statutory guideline

**Budgetary provision for environment & safety management system has been made in the project planning

with Rs. 4000 Lakhs will be used for Environmental Management System and Rs. 800 Lakhs as recurring

cost per annum.

Rs. 15 Lakhs will be allocated for Environment Monitoring.



Chapter-7

Additional Studies A) RISK ASSESSMENT

7.1 INTRODUCTION

The risk assessment studies have been conducted for identification of hazards, to

calculate damage distances and to spell out risk mitigation measures. M/s. Genext

Steels Private Limited is a Greenfield project, proposes establishment of mini

integrated steel plant with captive power plant at Survey Nos. 661, 662, 664, 665, 1822

& 1823, Village: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, District: Ahmedabad, State: Gujarat. Unit

proposes production of Pellet plant (Pellets – 800 TPD) DRI Kilns (Sponge Iron – 600

TPD), Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets – 1,000 TPD), Rolling Mill (Structural Steel TMT

Bars & Rolled products – 1,000 TPD), Power Generation–12 MW [7 MW through Waste

Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB) and 5 MW through Fluidized bed combustion (FBC)

Boiler].

Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of the various

hazards/unsafe conditions that exist in the plant. Risk analysis follows an extensive

hazard analysis, involving identification and assessment of risks the neighbouring

populations are exposed to as a result of hazards present. Based on the risk estimation

Disaster Management Plan (DMP) has been prepared.

7.2 STUDY OBJECTIVE

The objectives of environmental risk assessment are following,

Identifying the potential hazardous areas so that adequate design safety measures

can be adopted to reduce the likelihood of accidental events,

Identifying the stakeholders and evaluating their risk along with proposing

adequate control techniques,

Identifying the probable areas of environmental disaster which can be prevented by

proper design of the installations and its controlled operation, and

Managing the emergency situation or a disastrous event, if any, during the plant

operation.

7.3 HAZARDOUS IDENTIFICATION

Hazard identification involves the process of collecting information on:

The types and quantities of hazardous substances stored and handled,

The location of storage tanks & other facilities,



Potential hazards associated with the spillage and release of fuel.

The steel manufacturing industry is labor intensive and uses large scale and potentially

hazardous manufacturing processes. The industry experiences accident rates that are

high compared with some other manufacturing industries. Some examples of such

hazards likely to occur in proposed Sponge Iron Plant, Induction Furnace, Continuous

casting machine, Rolling Mill, CPP unit are given below. These mainly impact on those

working within the industry, although health hazards can also impact on local

communities.

Fire

Explosion

Physical Hazards due EOT cranes, conveyor system, material handling

Fugitive Dust of Raw Material handling at charging bay, storage yard, Crusher, DRI

Kiln, billet crushers

Occupational health issue of Fly Ash, slag crushing dust, dolomite exposure

Collapse of Structures/Fall of Material, stacking failure

Loading/Unloading /Packaging Operations failures

Electrocution/ Electrical Hazards

Accidental Spillage of hot molten metal & Diesel fuel

A preliminary hazard analysis here carried out is to identify the major hazards

associated. Finally, risk reducing measures are deduced and implemented. The

identification of hazards anticipation for the proposed project activities are presented

below.

7.3.1 Identification of source of Ignition

Creation of hotspots during operation & maintenance of Process equipment

Self-ignition of hot materials

The electrical Discharge (thunderbolt, electrostatic charges, short circuits), Static

charge.

7.3.2 Identification of sources of Fire & Explosion

Oil and Lubricant Room (spillage)

Fine Coal Hoppers

Coal Storage area

Electrical Substations (Short circuit)

FBC Boilers

Induction Furnace



7.3.3 Thermal radiation

Enlists damage consequences due to different Heat Loads are given below:

Table 7.1 List of Damages Envisaged at Various Heat Loads

Sr. No.

Heat loads

(kW/m²)

Type of Damage Intensity

Damage to Equipment Damage to People

1 37.5 Damage to process equipment 100% lethality in 1 min. 1%

2 25.0 Minimum energy required to ignite wood

50% Lethality in 1 min. Significant injury in 10 sec

3 19.0 Maximum thermal radiation intensity allowed on thermally unprotected equipment

--

4 12.5 Minimum energy required to melt plastic tubing

1% lethality in 1 min

5 4.0 -- First degree burns, causes pain for exposure longer than 10 sec

6 1.6 -- Causes no discomfort on long exposures

7.3.4 Physical Hazards onsite

Dust Exposure at coal handling area

Dust Exposure of Fly Ash, Bottom Ash

Dust Exposure of minerals, Slag (SMS)

Accident due to EOT crane, Conveyor system, Material handling

Slip/Trip/Fall due to improper stacking of material

7.3.5 Loading/Unloading operation/Storage

Approach of heavy good vehicles for unloading material

Work inside hopper/Silo for unblocking of mouth

Excessive Dust during Loading/unloading operation

Airborne dust

Conveyor moving parts

Cleaning of overflows

Unauthorized passages, travelling over transportation system

Motor overloading

Unclean platforms causing staggering and falls

7.3.6 Silo cleaning operation

Work in confined spaces

Falling of material

Falling of personal from working platform

Exposure to dust



Use of lifting equipment

7.3.7 Steel Melting Shop

The main hazards arise out of the use of hot metal and oxygen at the spillage of hot

metal cause serious burn injuries and fires. Severe explosions are also caused due to

hot metal falling over a pool of water, resulting in injuries to persons, fire and damage

to equipment due to flying of hot splinters & splashing of liquid metal/slag. Sudden

break out of molten metal result in heavy explosions, due to their coming in contact

with water, thereby causing serious burn injuries to persons and damage to equipment.

7.3.8 Electrical Hazard

Electrical equipment such as motors, circuit breakers, transformers, and switchgear can

produce sparks and ignite dust clouds and hybrid dust/air mixtures in the vicinity.

Ingress of dust into enclosures with subsequent ignition causes smoldering or

burning (fires)

Dust that enters an enclosure will settle out as layers on internal surfaces and

become heated

Electrically conductive dusts causes short-circuiting when deposited on exposed

electrical components and circuits

Abrasive and/or corrosive dusts damages components of electrical equipment

Electric shock

7.3.9 Dust and Gas

Dust is generated from handling and storage of raw materials. In the melting process,

high temperature operations are conducted; workers may be exposed to gas inhalation

hazards. Recommendations to prevent exposure to gas and dust include the following:

Facility for ventilation to maximize air circulation. Outlet air shall be filtered before

discharge to the atmosphere;

Exhaust ventilation should be installed at the significant point sources of dust and

gas emissions;

Provide separate eating facility that allow for washing before eating;

Provide facilities that allow work clothes to be separated from personal clothes,

and for washing/showering after work;

Implement a policy for periodic health checks.

7.3.10 Captive Power plant (CPP Unit)

Steam Handling and Pressure drop (Steam Explosion)

Fly Ash handling



Exposure to High temperatures

Physical Hazards

Blast overpressure

Design failure

Failure of Safety Relief devices

Id fan/PA fan/SA fan failure

Circulation line failure

Turbine system failure

Furnace bed maintenance for FBC Boiler

Dosing System Failure (HP and LP)

Failure of fuel firing system/Burner Management system (BMS)

RCC chimney blockage

Temperature drop and failure of Air cooled condenser, Low pressure (LP) and High

Pressure (HP) heater and Drain cooler

Failure of re-circular system

Pump failure (Boiler feed, HSD unloading, Transfer)

7.3.11 Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB Unit)

Blast Over pressure

Steam Pressure drop

Leak , Catastrophic rupture in gas lines

Temperature drop in Boiler, Pre heater

Process failure

7.3.12 Respiratory Hazards

Damaged material should be repaired or removed while other materials may be

monitored and managed. Any handling of insulation materials deemed to contain

asbestos or any other hazardous material should only be performed by properly

trained and certified contractors and personnel following internationally accepted

procedures for their repair or removal;

Use of asbestos must be avoided in new installations or upgrades;

An LDPE sheet should be placed under the item to be insulated (e.g. tube or vessel)

and under the stock of insulation material to be layered, to prevent surface

contamination with fibers.



7.3.13 Noise

Raw and product material handling as well as the production processes themselves

may generate excessive noise levels.

7.3.14 Fire & Explosion Hazards

Handling of liquid metal may result in explosions causing melt run out, and burns,

especially if humidity is trapped in enclosed spaces. Other hazards include fires caused

by melted metal and the presence of liquid fuel. Recommended techniques to prevent

and control explosion and fire hazards include the following:

Protect flammable gas, oxygen pipelines and combustible materials during ‘hot

work’ maintenance activities;

Design electrical equipment to prevent risk of fire in each plant area (e.g.

voltage/ampere design and degree of cable insulation; protection of cables against

hot liquid exposure; use of cable types that minimize fire propagation)

7.3.15 Heat and Hot Liquid

High temperatures and direct radiation are common hazards in integrated

metallurgical plants. High temperatures can cause fatigue and dehydration. Direct

radiation also poses a risk to sight. Potential contact with hot metal or hot water may

occur from the cooling zone, from splashes of melted metal, and from contact with hot

surfaces. Recommended measures for prevention and control of exposure to heat and

hot liquids/materials include the following:

Shield surfaces where close contact with hot equipment or splashing from hot

materials is expected;

Implement safety buffer zones to separate areas where hot materials are

handled or temporarily stored. Rail guards around those areas should be

provided, with interlocked gates to control access to areas during operations;

Use appropriate PPEs (e.g. insulated gloves and shoes, goggles to protect against

radiation, and clothing to protect against heat radiation and liquid metal

splashes);

Install cooling ventilation to control extreme temperatures;

Implement work rotations providing regular work breaks, access to a cool rest

area, and drinking water.

7.3.16 Fire & Explosion Index

Fire and Explosion Index (FEI) is useful in identification of areas in which the potential

risk reaches a certain level. It estimates the global risk associated with a process unit



and classifies the units according to their general level of risk. FEI covers aspects

related to the intrinsic hazard of materials, the quantities handled and operating

conditions. This factor gives index value for the area which could be affected by an

accident, the damage to property within the area and the working days lost due to

accidents. Fire and explosion index is then calculated as the product of Material Factor

(MF) and Unit Hazard Factor. Degree of hazards based on F& EI given in the following

Tables 7.2 and Table 7.3 respectively.

Table 7.2: Degree of Hazards Based on F& EI

FEI Range Degree of Hazard

0 – 60 Light

61 – 96 Moderate

97 – 127 Intermediate

128 - 158 Heavy

159 and Above Severe

Table 7.3: Calculated Degree of Hazards for Genext

S.

No.

Unit Parameter Hazard F&EI

Potential

Remarks

1 Raw

materials &

Products

Iron ore Light Physical Hazard

Coal Moderate Fire

Fly Ash, Bottom Ash, Slag

Moderate Dust & Toxic

Other fluxing minerals

Light Dust & Toxic

Product steel Light Physical Hazard

2 Iron making

In Rotary

kiln/Steel

making in

Induction

Furnace

Coal reduction

fuel gas

Intermediate Flammable and CO

pollution

Molten metal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

Hot Metal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

Burning coal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

3 Rolling Mills Hot rolled metal Intermediate Personnel injury & fire

4 Fuel gas

Distribution

Gas leaks Intermediate Fire and CO pollution

5 Electric power

supply

Short circuit Intermediate Fire

6 Transformer Electrical Fire Light Explosion & fire

7 Steam turbine

generator

building

Explosion Moderate Fires in Lube oil system, Short circuit in control room/ switch gear, cable galleries & oil drum storage

8 Boilers

explosion

Heat recovery Boilers Moderate Fire/steam

9 Coal Handling Storage shed Moderate Fire or dust explosion



plant

10 Coal Storage Storage shed Moderate Spontaneous

Combustion

7.3.17 Heat Stress

Workers who are exposed to extreme heat or work in hot environments may be at risk

of heat stress. Exposure to extreme heat can result in occupational illnesses and

injuries. Heat stress can result in heat stroke, heat exhaustion, heat cramps, or heat

rashes. Heat can also increase the risk of injuries in workers as it may result in sweaty

palms, fogged-up safety glasses, and dizziness. Burns may also occur as a result of

accidental contact with hot surfaces or steam. Prevention of heat stress in workers is

important. Employers should provide training to workers so they understand what heat

stress is, how it affects their health and safety, and how it can be prevented.

Radiant heat flux

intensity, kW/m2

Effects on people

1.5 No harm; safe for the general public and for the stationery personnel

2.5 Intensity tolerable for 5 min; severe pain above this exposure time

3 Intensity tolerable for non-frequent emergency situations for 30 min

5 Pain for 20 s exposure, first degree burn. Intensity tolerable for those

performing emergency operations

6 Intensity tolerable for escaping emergency personnel

9.5 Second degree burn after 20 seconds

12.5-15 First degree burn after 10 seconds, 1% fatality in 1 min

25 Significant injury in 10 s, 100% fatality in 1 min

35-37.5 1% fatality in 10 s

7.4 MITIGATION MEASURES

Risk Mitigation measures for the proposed project activities require adoption of best

safety practice at the respective construction zones as well as operational phase within

the works boundary. In addition, the design and engineering of the proposed facilities

will take into consideration of the proposed protection measures for air and water

environmental as outlined in earlier Chapter.

7.4.1 Coal Handling Plant

Coal handling unit shall be minimum 500 meters away from the residential area,

school/colleges, Historical Monuments, Religious Places, Ecological sensitive area

as well as forests area. Also from Railway line, Express ways, National Highways,

State ways and District Roads and from water bodies like River, Nala, Canal, Pond

etc.

Coal storage unit shall provide paved approach with adequate traffic carrying

capacity.



Compound wall with adequate height should be constructed around the coal

storage area

The unit should have adequate water supply through pipe/ surface water before

selection of the site.

Coal storage unit should ensure that stacking of coal in heaps does not get higher

than the compound wall of premises of unit

Adequate dust suppression measures should be provided to prevent fugitive

emission and also risk of fire. Similar measures should be adopted for

loading/unloading operations. Coal ash should be transported in tankers, which

are covered and closed and there is no chance of spillage during transportation.

Firefighting measures should be provided to avoid any fire and ensure that there is

no explosive or chemical reaction in storage yard.

Coal unit should take measures to control the air pollution while loading/handling

coal. Specific measures should be under-taken to avoid fugitive emission at the

time of loading/unloading of coal by individual coal yard unit.

7.4.2 Induction Furnace

Gas safety man would accompany the team and would test the atmosphere for the

presence of CO, before starting the work. If CO, concentration is found exceeding

the sage limit, the job would be undertaken using necessary safety appliances viz.,

Oxygen Breathing Apparatus/Blower type Gas mask.

Any gas cutting /welding job would be undertaken with the clearance from Gas

safety man.

7.4.3 Control Rooms

Control rooms shall be blast proof and shock proof

The building shall be located upwind of the process storage and handling facilities.

Adequate number of doors shall be provided in the control room for safe exit

Smoke detectors system shall be provided for control rooms at suitable locations

One hydrant (minimum) for every 45m per wall of the building shall be positioned

all around the building

7.4.4 Gas Explosion, Prevention & Preventive Measure

The following actions would be taken to prevent any gas explosions in case of gas

leakage.

For works on gas lines/equipment, non-sparkling copper tools will used. If such

tools are not available, grease coated steel tools would be used.



Electrical drill & other electrical equipment will not be used as these can give rise

to sparks.

The gas line would be thoroughly purged with steam before undertaking the job on

the same.

Naked lights will not be used near any de-pressurized gas main or equipment

unless the same has been thoroughly purged.

In case of profuse leakage of gas, action would be taken for water sealing and

isolating that portion.

The approach road to the gas line complex would be kept free from any

obstructions.

If gas catches fire due to some leakage, it will be extinguished with plastic clay,

steam or water.

The portion of gas main affected would be cooled down with water. The valve will

not be closed when fire is still there and the pressure in the main will be

maintained at minimum 100mm (WC).

Gas tapping points of flow or pressure measurement will be cleaned with wooden

stick or grease coated wire.

If lighting is necessary near gas line, portable spark, proof electrical lamps of low

voltage or explosion proof torchlight will be used for enclosed areas.

7.4.5 Mitigation measure for Hot Metal spillage

Any accumulation of water will be prevented in such vulnerable areas.

In case of minor leakages, the flow of molten metal will be controlled.

If there is major breakout, the area would be cut off and cordoned.

Vital connections e.g. water, gas, compressed air, oxygen etc., would be cut off or

regulated as per requirement.

7.4.6 Electrical safety

Adequately rated and quick response circuit breakers, aided by reliable and

selective digital or microprocessor based electromagnetic protective relays would

be incorporated in the electrical system design for the proposed activities.

The metering and instruments would be of proper accuracy class and scale

dimensions.

Fire Hydrant system



All the fire extinguisher system will be controlled by the Security Department.

Safety department will consist of qualified safety manager, safety officer and

supporting staff.

Portable fire extinguishers

Sprinkler system employed near fire prone areas

Fire Buckets

Table 7.4: Details of Fire Fighting Facilities onsite

Sr. No. Name of site Type of Extinguisher

1 Cable galleries CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

2 High voltage panel CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

3 Control rooms CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

4 MCC rooms CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

5 Pump Houses CO2 & Foam type, Dry chemical powder

6 Offices Dry chemical powder, foam type

7 Godowns Foam type

8 Bunkers, Silo,

enclosed dust

collector

CO2 type, N2 type, automatic sprinkler, fixed

spray nozzle (unless water reactive)



7.4.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Personal Protective equipment kept onsite are made readily available to plant

personnel. Table 7.5 shows the lists of recommended Personal Protective equipment

(PPE) onsite.

Table 7.5: Summary of Recommended Personal Protective Equipment According

to Hazard

Description Workplace Hazards Suggested PPE

Eye and face

protection

Flying particles, molten metal,

gases or vapors, light radiation

Safety glasses with side-shields,

protective shades, etc.

Head protection

Falling objects, inadequate

height clearance, and overhead

power cords

Plastic helmets for top and side

impact protection

Hearing protection Noise Hearing protectors (ear plugs or ear

muffs)

Foot

protection

Failing or rolling objects, points

objects. Corrosive or hot

liquids

Safety shoes and boots for

protection against moving and

failing objects, liquids and

chemicals

Hand protection

Hazardous materials, cuts or

lacerations, vibrations, extreme

temperatures

Gloves made of rubber or synthetic

material (Neoprene), leather, steel,

insulation materials, etc.

Respiratory

protection

Dust, fogs, fumes, mists, gases,

smokes, vapors

Facemasks with appropriate

filters for dust removal and air

purification (chemical, mists,

vapors and gases).

Single or multi-gas personal

monitors, if available

Oxygen deficiency Portable or supplied air (fixed

lines). Onsite rescue equipment

Body/leg

protection

Extreme temperatures,

hazardous materials, biological

agents, cutting and laceration

Insulating clothing, body suits,

aprons etc. of appropriate materials

Fly Ash Fly ash handling and storage For handling, dust-proof

goggles and rubber or PVC

gloves.

For large quantities or where

heavy contamination is likely,

wear: coveralls.

For high dust levels, wear: a

Full-face Class P3 (Particulate)

or an Air-line respirator.

For inhalation risk exists, wear:

a Class P1 (Particulate)

respirator.



7.5 NATURAL CALAMITIES WHICH MAY LEAD TO EMERGENCY

7.5.1 Heat Stroke

Heat stroke is the most serious heat-related disorder. It occurs when the body becomes

unable to control its temperature: the body's temperature rises rapidly, the sweating

mechanism fails, and the body is unable to cool down. When heat stroke occurs, the

body temperature can rise to 106 0F or higher within 10 to 15 minutes. Heat stroke can

cause death or permanent disability if emergency treatment is not given. Measures

proposed for reduction of heat stress around furnace and for safe handling of the hot

metal considering the provision of Gujarat Factories Rules.

Symptoms of heat stress

Symptoms of heat stroke include:

Hot, dry skin or profuse sweating

Hallucinations

Chills

Throbbing headache

High body temperature

Confusion/dizziness

Slurred speech

First Aid

Take the following steps to treat a worker with heat stroke:

Move the sick worker to a cool shaded area.

Cool the worker using methods such as:

Soaking their clothes with water.

Spraying, sponging, or showering them with water.

Fanning their body.

7.5.2 Earthquake

The project area falls under the seismic zone-III, which is the Low risk earthquake. It

may trigger into a technological disaster, includes collapse of old structures, buildings

leading to fire and explosion. Earthquake cannot usually be forecasted and therefore

precautions immediately prior to such event are not usually possible.

Emergency recovery plan has been considered by the emergency management team as

per the situation and site conditions as follows in Table 7.6:



Table 7.6

Emergency recovery plan

Step Activity Action By

Preparedness Constitute Emergency Response Team

Identify ECC, if the identified ones are

damaged

Control centers to be equipped with

Alarming

Communication facilities

Emergency vehicles/equipment

List of emergency contacts & suppliers

Medical facilities

Plant Key Person

Action during

effective

period

Do not panic. Raise alarm

Avoid standing near to windows, external

walls

Stand near the columns or duck under

sturdy furniture.

Assemble at emergency assembly point as

there may be aftershocks

Individual(s)

Action after

effective

Period

(Establish

Emergency

Control

Center. Site

Main

Controller to

direct

all activities)

Assess situation and initiate shut down of

plants (if required)

Initiate search & rescue (if required)

Evacuation of people.

Recovery/ Rehabilitation Work

Medical care for the injured.

Supply of food and drinking water.

Temporary shelters like tents, metal sheds

etc.

Repairing lines of communication and

information.

Restoring transport routes

Take head count

Activate emergency plan as situation

demands

Assess damage

Main Controller,

Incident Controller,

Site Incident

Controller,

Coordinators – Fire &

Security, Safety,

Material and Medical

7.5.3 Cyclone

The project area falls under low risk for Cyclone. The contingency actions shall be based

on the weather forecasts obtained from meteorological stations and the local

meteorological department. Some of the important actions to be carried out are as

follows:



Prior to Cyclone

Communication with the local meteorological department.

Maintain distances from storm in order to execute preparatory actions in a shorter

time.

Considering the consequences about the emergency might have on operations and

personnel.

Review all operations carefully to ensure that systems in jeopardy are taken care of

or shut down.

Ensure the readiness of first aiders, emergency vehicles, medical centre, medicines

etc.

Metallic sheets, loose materials, empty drums and other light objects shall be

properly secured.

Flush the drainage systems.



During Storm

Remain calm.

Avoid going outdoors.

Do not seal the office completely as the suction created by the difference in

atmospheric pressure inside and outside can rip open a window or door by

breaking window glass panes.

After the Storm

Do not touch electric lines.

Stay away from the disaster area.

Take special precautions in driving vehicles since the under-pavement could cave

in due to the weight of automobile.

7.5.4 Flood

The study area is at moderate risk for floods due to dam overflow. Flood control

measures will be taken as required maintaining the Plant safety.



7.6 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS & OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Safety of plant personnel and equipment’s is of paramount importance irrespective of

plant size. Unit should bring its environment, health and safety policy and follow it.

Proper safety procedures are being followed as far as possible including the use of

personal protective gadgets (hand gloves, dust masks, face shield, goggles, apron etc. as

required) by the workers while charging material manually (if required). A schedule

has been drawn up for regular preventive maintenance of each unit and the same needs

to be faithfully followed as far as possible. The unit's management should ensure that

all rotating machines and moving parts are provided with appropriate guards and the

guards are put back in the position after checkup and maintenance. All the control

systems are being periodically checked for their reliability and accuracy. Ventilation has

been provided in process area where chances of buildup of concentration of hazardous

chemicals are high to prevent fire/toxic hazard. Electrical grounding of all equipment is

ensured. Genext Steel Pvt. Ltd. will adopt suitable measures for the proper

occupational health safety of workers complying to OSHA standards. Permissible

Exposure Level (PEL) of various Chemical Handled onsite is listed below in Table 7.7.

Dust Exposure level of shop floor workers shall be appropriately monitored.

Check of the effectiveness of preventive and control measures on regular basis.

Adequate supplies of potable drinking water is to be provided .Water supplied to

areas of Plant food preparation or for the purpose of personal hygiene (washing or

bathing) are according to drinking water quality standards.

Where there is potential for exposure to harmful dusts by ingestion arrangements

are to be made for clean eating areas, where workers are not exposed to the

hazardous or noxious substances.

Periodic medical hearing checks are to be performed on workers exposed to high

noise levels.

Provisions are to be made to provide OHS orientation training to all new employees

to ensure they are apprised of the basic site rules of work at/on the site and of

personal protection and preventing injury to fellow employees.

Contractors that have the technical capability to manage the occupational health

and safety issues of their employees are to be hired, extending the application of the

hazard management activities through formal procurement agreements.

Ambulances and first aid treatment facilities are made available for any emergency

situation.



Table 7.7: PEL level Summary as per OSHA

Sr. No.

Chemical Name OSHA PEL

Cal/OSHA PEL

NIOSH REL ACGIH

mg/m3 8-hour TWA (ST) STEL (C) Ceiling

mg/m3

Up to 10-hour TWA (ST) STEL

(C) Ceiling mg/m3

TLV

1. Coal Dust 0.9 (resp.) bituminous or lignite; 0.4 (resp.) anthracite (coal dust to be monitored for crystalline silica

a) Respirable fraction less than 5% SiO2

2.4 mg/m3) 0.9 (bituminous) 1

b) Respirable fraction greater than 5% SiO2

10/(%SO2) 0.1 (bituminous)

2. Iron oxide 10 (fume) 5 (fume) 5 (dust and fume)

5 mg/m3

3. Fly Ash (calcium oxide, sillicates)

-- -- -- 1 mg/m, natural as Wollastonite (IHL, no asbestos and <1% crystalline silica

4. Carbon Mono oxide

55 mg/m3 25 ppm

35 ppm 25 ppm

Reference- OSHA/PEL exposure limit Guide

Workers' health shall be evaluated by pre designed format, given below for chest X

rays, Audiometry, Spirometrv, Vision testing (Far & Near vision. color vision and any

other ocular defect) ECG, during pre-placement and periodical examinations that will

give the details of the same.

Spirometry Tests

Year

Total

Manpower

FVC

(litres)

FEV 1 FEV 1/FVC

%

PEFR Conclusion

Physical Examination Tests

Year Total

Manpower Pulse ECG BP Right

Eye Left

Eye Color

Blindness Squint

Investigations Tests

Year Total

Manpower

Blood

(CBC)

Blood Sugar (F&

PP)

Lipid

profile

Urine

(R&M)

Conclusion

Audiometry Tests

Year

Total

Manpower

Audiometry

done

Normal Abnormal Conclusion



Annual report of health will be reviewed for Genext Steel Pvt. Ltd., manpower once the

facility the proposed activity is operational as per above given formats.

Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract

and casual workers.

Necessary required budgetary allocation will be kept for to ensure safety of all

Employees including contract & casual workers.

7.7 RISK REDUCTION MEASURES

For the risk reduction, the following salient suggestions and recommendations are

made:

On site and off site emergency response plan should be prepared and circulated to

concern persons.

Personnel at the proposed plant and public in surrounding area should be made

aware about the plant and risk associated with them.

A written process safety information document should be compiled for general use.

The document compilation should include an assessment of the hazards presented

including (i) Physical data (ii) thermal data (iii) process and mechanical design.

A system of checking testing/sealing of relief valves during major plant overhauls

should be instituted for plant equipment, wherever it is applicable.

Predictive and preventive maintenance schedule should be prepared for equipment,

piping, etc. and thickness testing should be done periodically as per standard

practices.

Safe work practices should be developed to provide for the control of hazards

during operation and maintenance such as: (i) lockout /tag out (ii) Confined space

entry (iii) Opening process equipment or piping (iv) Control over entrance into a

facility by maintenance, contractor or other support personnel.

Personnel engaged in handling of hazard activities should be trained to respond in

an unlikely event of emergencies.

The plant should check and ensure that all instruments provided in the plant are in

good condition, regular preventive maintenance must be carried out and records of

preventive maintenance should be maintained.

Safety measures in the form of Do and Don’t Do should be displayed at strategic

locations especially in local language and English.



7.8 GENERAL WORKING CONDITIONS

(a) House Keeping

All the passages, floors and stairways should be maintained in good condition. The

system should be available to deal with any spillage of dry or liquid chemical at the

plant.

Walkways should be clearly marked and free from obstructions.

In the plant, precaution and instructions should be displayed at strategic locations.

All pits, sumps should be properly covered or securely fenced.

Roads/walkway within the plant should be maintained neat and clean.

(b) Ventilation

Adequate ventilation should be provided in the work floor environment.

The work environment should be assessed and monitored regularly.

Local ventilation is most effective method for controlling dust and gaseous

emissions at work floor.

7.8.1 Safe Operating Procedures

Safe operating procedures should be available for all operations practices and

equipment.

The workers should be informed of the consequences of failure to observe the safe

operating procedures.

7.8.2 Work Permit System

Work permit system should be followed at the plant. Hazardous work permit should be

used for hot work, electrical works, working in confined space etc.

7.8.3 Personnel Protective Equipment (PPEs)

The required PPEs for each area/operation should be identified and the necessary

PPEs, like helmets, goggles, hand gloves, mask, safety belts, ear muff and plug, etc.

should be made available to the personnel.

The workers should be trained for proper use of PPEs.

The system should establish and maintained for replacement of damaged PPEs by

testing and safety requirements.

Lockers should be provided to the workers for safe custody and storage of PPEs.

7.8.4 Emergency Preparedness

On-site emergency plan should be prepared and readily available for an unlikely

event of emergency.



Emergency telephone numbers should be available and display properly strategic

locations.

7.8.5 Static Electricity

All equipment and storage tanks/containers of flammable materials should be

bounded and earthed.

Electrical resistance for earthing circuits should be maintained. Periodic inspections

should be done for earth pit and record should be maintained.

7.8.6 Access

Adequate safe access should be provided to all places where workers need to work

and all such access should be in good condition.

7.8.7 Material Handling

Material handling areas should be clearly defined.

The workers should be made aware about the hazards associated with manual

material handling.

7.8.8 Communication System

Adequate communication facilities should be available at the plant and supported

with uninterrupted power supply.

Communication facilities should be checked periodically for its proper functioning.

7.8.9 First Aid Facilities

First box should be provided at strategic locations within the plant.

At least one stature should be available in first aid room.

List of important telephone numbers should be displayed in first aid room.

7.8.10 Accident Reporting, Investigation and Analysis

A system should be initiated for accident and near miss reporting, investigation and

analysis. To motivate and awareness among the personnel at the plant about safety,

total accident (lost time injury) free days can be displayed on the board prominently at

strategic location.

7.8.11 Safety Inspections

The system should be initiated for checklist based routine safety inspection and

internal audit of the plant periodically. Safety inspection team should be formed from

various disciplines and departments.

7.8.12 Safe Operating Procedures

Safe operating procedures should be formulated and updated, specific to process &

equipment and distributed to concerned plant personnel.



7.9 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN (DMP)

A comprehensive DMP that will be implemented in the industry as presented below.

7.9.1 Objectives

To localize the emergency

To minimize the consequences

To ensure that following concepts are considered, namely rescue, first aid,

evacuation, rehabilitation, spreading the information.

7.9.2 Elements of On-Site Emergency Plan

Assess the size of event

Plan formulation and liaison

Actions like: Raise alarm, communication within and outside

Appoint key personnel and deploy. Appoint Controller.

Emergency Control Center

Action on site/Action off-site.

Alarm and visual signals at strategic points

7.9.3 Organization

Table 7.8 Organization Chart

Chief Controller of Disasters (Factory General Manager) Team-1 Team-2 Team-3 Team-4 Team-5 Team-6

Area Coordinator

Medical Coordinator

Material Coordinator

Fire-Safety Coordinator

PR Coordinator

Security Coordinator

Plant Manager

Chief Chemist

Civil Engineer

Power plant Manager

HR Manager

Security Officer

7.9.4 Duty Allocation

1. Chief Disaster Controller (Chief Operating Officer)

• Take control and declare emergency

• Be there

• Contact Authorities

2. Area Co-Ordinator

• Take steps. Make emergency shut-down of activities. Put everything in safe

condition.

• Evacuate.

• Commence initial firefighting, till Fire Department comes to take up.

• Identify materials requirements and call Material Manager.

3. Medical Co-Ordinator

• Establish Emergency Center, Treat affected persons, Transfer/ Remove Patients



• Assign and Deploy staff

• Contact Authorities

4. Material Co-Ordinator

• Dispatch necessary supplies

• Arrange purchases

5. Fire & Safety Co-Ordinator

• Overall in-charge for Fire and Safety.

• Coordinate with area coordinator and direct the operations

• Coordinate with City and other fire-tenderers.

6. Security Co-Ordinator

• Remove crowd

• Arrange gate security

• Contact Police

• Arrange evacuation

• Contact outside Agencies if asked.

• Handle news media

• Mobilize vehicles

• Arrange food, clothing to Officers inside.

7. Emergency Control Center

• Adequate Internal phones

• Adequate external phones

• Workers tally

• Map showing hazardous storages, fire horns, safety equipments, gates and side

gates, assembly points, list of persons.

8. Action on Site

• Evacuate. Non-essential people first at assembly point

• Persons accounting & Record of next-of-kin

• Public relations

9. Post Disaster Analysis

• Why it happened?

• Whether on-site operations failed? In what respect?

• How to avoid such failure in future?

• Report to be submitted in detail to Authorities.

• Compensation arrangements if any, commenced?



• Call suggestions on shortfalls observed.

• Give rewards openly, pull defaulters individually.

7.10 INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS AND SAFETY

Maintenance of occupational safety and health is very closely related to productivity

and good employer-employee relationship. The plant will be operated in compliance

with all applicable safety and health laws and regulations. For occupational safety

following measures will be incorporated in the proposed plant.

7.10.1 Hazard Identification

Safety Audit will be conducted by qualified technical personnel to study the installation

and activities of the industry and to suggest measures to protect personnel and

property against the risks. The areas of possible hazardous incident are given for follow

up action:

i. Fire in coal & coke storage yard, and diesel storage tanks.

ii. Electric Short circuit and consequent fire accident.

iii. Any likely sort of explosion in Boiler area

iv. Puncture in inside wall of induction furnace

v. Fall from high level structures

7.11 ON-SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN

The On-Site emergency plan will be circulated to all concerned members of emergency

teams. It is essential that all concerned familiarize themselves with the overall on-site

emergency plan and their respective roles and responsibilities during and in

emergency. They should also participate regularly in the mock drills that will be

conducted so as to keep themselves and the emergency organization in a state of

perpetual preparedness at all times to meet any emergency.

7.11.1 Objectives, Scope and Contents of On-Site Emergency Plan

Objectives of emergency planning are to maximize the resource utilization and

combined efforts towards emergency operations and would broadly cover the

following.

To localize the emergency and if possible eliminate it.

To minimize the effects of accidents on people and property.

To take remedial measures in the quickest possible time to contain the incident

and control it with minimum damage.

To mobilize the internal resources and utilize them in the most effective way.



To get help from the local community and government officials to supplement

internal manpower and resources.

To minimize the damage in other sections.

To keep the required emergency equipment in stock at right places and ensure

that they are in working condition.

To keep the concerned personnel fully trained in the use of emergency

equipment.

To give immediate warning to the surrounding localities in case of an emergency

situation arising.

To mobilize transport and medical treatment of the injured.

To educate the public in the surrounding villages regarding hazards.

To arrange for rescue and treatment of casualties.

To safe guard the people.

To identify the causalities and communicate to relatives.

To render necessary help to concerned.

To rehabilitate area affected.

To provide information to media & government agencies

7.11.2 Scope of Onsite Emergency Plan

The plan covers information regarding the properties of the Industry, type of disasters

and disaster/accident-prone zones, the actual disaster control plans with authority

delegation, controlling and other details. General details like location, project layout,

neighboring entities and the assistance they can render etc., are also provided.

The important elements considered in this plan are;

Statutory requirements

Emergency organization

Roles and Responsibilities

Communications during emergency

Emergency shutdown & control of situation

Rescue & Rehabilitation

Emergency facilities

Important Information

The primary purpose of the on-site emergency plan or DMP is to control and contain

the incident and to prevent them from spreading. It is not possible to cover every

eventuality in the plan and the successful handling of the emergency will depend on



appropriate action and decisions being taken on the spot. Other important aspects

needing to be considered include the following.

7.11.3 Emergency

A major emergency in any situation is one, which has the potential to cause serious

injury or loss of life, which may cause extensive damage to the structures in the vicinity

and environment and could result in serious disruption to normal operation both inside

and outside the industry premises. Depending on the magnitude of the emergency,

services of the outside agencies may also be required for supplementing the internal

effort to effectively handle the emergency and to contain the damage.

The Management has to take effective steps to assess, minimize and wherever feasible

eliminate the risks to a large extent. Accidents may still occur and it is necessary to be

fully prepared to tackle all such emergencies if and when they occur. It is likely that the

consequences of such emergencies will be confined to the units concerned or may affect

outside. If the consequences are confined within the plant boundary, it is then termed

as On Site Emergency and will be controlled by Chief Emergency Controller.

In order to generate the plans it is necessary to first determine the kinds of accidents

leading to an emergency that can occur in the industry. The most widely used technique

in practice is based on experience accumulated over many years and safety audits.

7.11.4 Methodology

The considerations in an emergency planning include the following:-

Identification and assessment of hazards and risks

Hazard, consequence analysis

Alarm and communication procedures

Identifying, appointment of personnel & assignment of responsibilities

Identification and equipping Emergency control centre, Identifying Assembly,

Rescue points, Medical facilities.

Emergency preparedness plan, procedures, steps to be taken before, during and

after emergency.

Formulation of plan and emergency sources.

Training rehearsal, evaluation and updating the plan.

7.11.5 Structure of Emergency Management

a. Noticing the accidents

b. Informing declarer of emergency

c. Declaration of emergency



d. Functions of declarer

e. Interaction with outside agencies

f. Emergency action plan & chart

g. Emergency action plan

h. In case of major emergency, the steps to be taken immediately by various agencies

are all follows.

Sr.

No.

Step to be taken Agency

1 Noticing of emergency situation Operator/Supervisor

2 Assessment of Situation Section head

3 Information to emergency Declarer HOD

4 Plant siren for declaring emergency

depending on situation

Emergency Declarer

5 Shutdown of equipments /Plant Shop Head

6 Assessment of impact and organizing control

measure

Incident/Site Controller

7 Proper function of control rooms Emergency controller

8 Co-ordination with outside agencies GM – HR

9 Control measures at site

(Rescue, evacuation, Fire Fighting etc.)

Incident Controller

10 Seeking help from outside, nearby factories Incident controller &

safety Head

11 All clear Signal (After controlling emergency

situation)

Emergency Declarer

7.11.6 Infrastructure at Emergency Control Centre

Emergency control centers should therefore contain the following:

An adequate number of external telephones; if possible, one should accept only

outgoing calls, in order to bypass jammed switchboards during an emergency.

An adequate number of internal telephones

Radio equipment

A plan of the works, to show:

Areas where there are large inventories of hazardous materials.

Sources of safety and first aid equipment.

The fire-Fighting system and additional sources of water.

Site entrance and roadways, including up-to-date information on road Traffic.

Assembly points.

Vehicle parking and rail sidings.



Additional work and layout plans detailing alternate routes and affected areas,

during an emergency.

Note pads, pens and pencils.

A list of key personnel, with addresses, telephone numbers, etc.

The emergency control center should be sited in an area of minimum risk. Suitable

location from where clear view of the plant is possible or the control room can be

designated as Emergency Control Center. All the Site Controller/ Incident Controller

Officers, Senior Personnel would be located here or have access to the ECC.

7.11.7 Assembly Point

In an emergency, it will certainly be necessary to evacuate personnel from affected

areas and as precautionary measure, to further evacuate non-essential workers, in the

first instance, from areas likely to be affected, should the emergency escalate. The

evacuation will be effected on getting necessary message from i.e. on evacuation;

employees would be directed to a predetermined safe place called Assembly Point.

Proposed Location: Area opposite to service building will be the Assembly Point where

all non-key personnel would assemble on getting direction over Public-Address System.

Outdoor assembly points, predetermined and pre-marked, will also be provided to

accommodate evacuees from affected plant area(s). Roll call of personnel collected at

these assembly points, indoor and outdoor will be carried out by roll call crew of safety

team to account for any missing person(s) and to initiate search and rescue operations

if necessary.

7.11.8 Emergency Management Training

The Key Personnel would undergo special courses on disaster management. This

may preferably be in-plant training. The Managers, Senior Officers and Staff would

undergo a course on the use of personal protective equipment.

The Key Personnel belonging to various Teams would undergo special courses as

per their expected nature of work at the time of emergency.

The plant management should conduct special courses to outside agencies like

district fire services to make them familiar with the plant layout and other aspects,

which will be helpful to them during an emergency.

7.11.9 Mock Drills

It is imperative that the procedures laid in this Plan are put to the test by conducting

Mock Drills. To avoid any lethality, the emergency response time would be clocked

below 2 minutes during the mock drill.



1st Step: Test the effectiveness of communication system

2nd Step: Test the speed of mobilization of the plant emergency teams

3rd Step: Test the effectiveness of search, rescue and treatment of casualties

4th Step: Test emergency isolation and shut down and remedial measures taken on

the system

5th Step: Conduct a full rehearsal of all the actions to be taken during an emergency.

The Disaster Management Plan would be periodically revised based on experiences

gained from the mock drills.

7.11.10 Proposed Communication System

The instrument and control system will take care of the following operating philosophy

of the plant-

The project will be provided with a control system located in a central control room.

The shift engineer will operate the plant from his console panel.

All operations will be represented in a graphic panel on the console and every

operation will be depicted as operating sequences.

All operating parameters will be displayed in digital format.

Alarms will be provided for all parameters, when they exceed set values.

High-High/Low-Low alarms and trip functions will be provided to trip

Pumps/compressors to bring the entire system to a safe shutdown.

Alarm signal code is set for process description

7.11.11 Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical burns,

fire burns, etc., would be maintained in the medical center as well as in the Emergency

Control Room. A range of medicines should be maintained in the ECC/Medical Center.

Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment should be provided and

maintained. The Medical Center should display poster for treating burns and first aid.

The qualified doctors of the medical center should use their professional judgment for

medical treatment.

7.12 OFF SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

Objective

If the effects of the accident or disaster inside the plant are felt outside of its premises,

it calls for an off-site emergency plan, which should be prepared and documented in

advance in consultation with the District Authorities.

Key Personnel



The ultimate responsibility for the management of the off-site emergencies rests on the

Collector/District Magistrate/ Deputy Commissioner. He will be assisted by

representatives from all concerned organizations, departments and services at the

District level. This core group of officers would be called the District Crisis Management

Group (CMG). The members of the group will include:

1) Collector/District Magistrate Deputy Commissioner

2) Commissioner of Police

3) Municipal Commissioner, if municipalities are involved

4) Deputy Director, Health

5) Pollution Control Board Representative

An Operation Response Group (ORG) will then be constituted to implement the

directives of the CMG. The various government departments, some or all of which will

be concerned, depending on the nature of the emergency, could include:

Police Animal Husbandry

Health & Family Welfare Agriculture

Medical Civil Defense

Revenue PWD

Fire Service Civil Supplies

Transport Panchayats

Electricity

The SC and IC, of the on-site emergency team, will also be responsible for

communications with the CMG during the off-site emergency.

Education to Public

People living within the influence zone should be educated on the emergency in a

suitable manner. This can be achieved only through the Local and District Authorities.

However, the Project Authority can extend necessary information to the Authorities.

In the aftermath, factory inspectors may wish to ensure that the affected areas are

rehabilitated safely. In addition, they may require items of plant and equipment

essential for any subsequent investigation to be impounded for expert analysis, and

may also want to interview witness as soon as practicable.

In the state of Gujarat, District Emergency Control (Contingent) plans have been

formulated, and some rehearsed, for some districts and the copies are available from

the local factory inspectorate. All hazardous factories needing on-site and off-site

emergency plans are advised to keep constant liaison with them.



The communication system between the factory and various above role-playing

authorities must be effective. Ineffective public telephone system will not be useful in

emergencies. Therefore, it should be improved and other effective system like duplex

(two way) radio telephone, wireless set, hot line, emergency lead vehicles, etc., should

be maintained between important organizations.



(B) Social Impact Assessment

Total land 37.82 Acre is purchased from the owners on a mutually agreed price. There

will be no Rehabilitation & Resettlement (R&R) involved as there is no habitation or

livestock in the acquired land. However, preference will be given to local people for

employment.

Detailed Social Impact Assessment (SIA) study is given below:

Introduction

Corporate Environmental Responsibility (CER) refers to a company’s duties to

withdraw from damaging natural environments. The term derives

from Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). Also can be referred as corporate initiative

to assess and take responsibility for the company's effects on the environment and

impact on social welfare. The term generally applies to companies efforts that go

beyond what may be required by regulators or environmental protection groups.

Moreover, while proposing the Corporate Social Responsibility Rules under Section 135

of the Companies Act, 2013, the Chairman of the CSR Committee mentioned the Guiding

Principle as follows: "CSR is the process by which an organization thinks about and

evolves its relationships with stakeholders for the common good, and demonstrates its

commitment in this regard by adoption of appropriate business processes and

strategies. Thus CSR is not charity or mere donations. CSR is a way of conducting

business, by which corporate entities visibly contribute to the social good. Socially

responsible companies do not limit themselves to using resources to engage in

activities that increase only their profits. They use CSR to integrate economic,

environmental and social objectives with the company's operations and growth." CSR is

not charity or mere donations. CSR is a way of conducting business, by which corporate

entities visibly contribute to the social good. Socially responsible companies do not

limit themselves to using resources to engage in activities that increase only their

profits. They use CSR to integrate economic, environmental and social objectives with

the company's operations and growth.

Corporate Social Responsibility is not a new concept in India, however, the Ministry of

Corporate Affairs, Government of India has recently notified the Section 135 of the

Companies Act, 2013 along with Companies (Corporate Social Responsibility Policy)

Rules, 2014 "hereinafter CSR Rules" and other notifications related thereto which

makes it mandatory (with effect from 1st April, 2014) for certain companies who fulfill



the criteria as mentioned under Sub Section 1 of Section 135 to comply with the

provisions relevant to Corporate Social Responsibility.

CSR is generally understood as being the way through which a company achieves a

balance of economic, environmental and social imperatives ("Triple-Bottom-Line-

Approach"), while at the same time addressing the expectations of shareholders and

stakeholders. The term "Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)" can be referred as

corporate initiative to assess and take responsibility for the company's effects on the

environment and impact on social welfare. The term generally applies to companies

efforts that go beyond what may be required by regulators or environmental protection

groups.

Purpose of the CER/CSR

Corporate social responsibility (CSR) is a broad term used to describe a company's

efforts to improve society in some way. These efforts can range from donating money to

non-profits to implementing environmentally-friendly policies in the workplace. The

group's CSR activities are rooted in the knowledge that businesses have a duty to

enable all living beings to get a fair share of the planet's resources. Businesses are

powerful constituents of society and the most successful, respected, and desirable

businesses exist to do much more than make money; they exist to use the power of

business to solve social and environmental problems. Genext will involve in a

community development and environment preservation projects. Social activities relate

to health, primary education, skills training and entrepreneurship, livelihoods and

women empowerment.

Objective of study

The main objectives are as follows:

1. To assess the impact of the project on agricultural situation;

2. To examine the impact of the project on pattern of demand;

3. To assess the in impact of the project on consumption pattern;

4. To examine employment and income effects of the project;

5. To explore the possibility of local industrialization as an offshoot of the

Project;

6. To examine the effect of the project on education status of the people in the study

area; and

7. To judge peoples' perception regarding the project



Survey Methodology

The survey aims to document the living conditions, level of socio-economic

development of the region and the socio-economic profile of people in the core and

buffer zones of the study area. The survey was organized to collect information on

socio-economic variables at the village level as well as household level. The village level

data are collected from revenue offices, Panchayat office; Censuses while the household

level data are collected through questionnaire method. The agreed methodology has

been followed with the tools of SIA. The following strategies were adopted for

undertaking the study.

Consultation with Representatives of focus area

Close coordination was maintained with concerned Public Representative’s Offices,

Local representatives and common village people. Assessment of the area was made by

industry representative along with Team of M/s San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd.

Assessment of studied area

Pre-contract field visit was conducted with assessment of the area and people

interacting with concerned employees and few opinion leaders of the area. This visit

facilitated the strategic plan to complete the study in stipulated time.

Focus Group Discussion

A guiding principle was developed to conduct focused group discussion with different

categories of people of the studied villages.

Study of Village Profile

This study includes village level survey of Population, Economics, Land use Pattern,

Employment pattern, Healthcare Facilities, Amenities for Livelihood. This primary data

is statistically validated and the statistical differences and is interpreted in the light of

economic impacts.

Sources of Information

As per the scope of present study, the information on the sociological aspects like

demography, human settlements, social aspects like SC & ST population, literacy levels

and economic aspects like occupational structure of workers has been gathered and

complied from secondary sources viz. the District Census Statistical Handbook, 2011 for

Ahmedabad district as these documents being comprehensive and authentic. Land use

pattern and infrastructure, demographic and socio-economic environment, and living

standard and infrastructure as per the census record of 2011 are provided in Section

3.15 of Chapter 3.



Socio Economic Survey within study area:

1) Educational facility

Literacy is an important indicator for understanding the socio-economic development

of any area. Many villages of the study area have no proper education facility and

literacy rate is very low especially women. According to the Gujarat State Census

Statistical Handbook, 2011, the male literacy in the study area is found to be 66% and

the female literacy in the study area is found to be 44%. The difference in literacy rate

between male and female is found be much wider. The overall study indicates that the

literacy rate in female population is alarmingly low which can be attributed to the social

structure prevailing in the villages and traditional family trends. The educational

facilities in the study area are good due to the presence of good infrastructure for basic

education like primary schools and high schools for higher education.

As per 2011 census, there are 14 primary schools, 4 Secondary schools, 2 senior

secondary school in all 13 villages within 10 km radius. As per field survey, there are 18

Primary Schools, 12 Secondary Schools, 3 High School within 10 km radius of the area.

However, there is a lack of ITI within this area keeping in view of the industrialization

around these villages and need of semi-skilled and skilled labor for the industrial units.

Area is an industrial zone and skilled manpower is essential. Unit will contribute to

start vocational training or join hands with other industrial group ITI institutes.

2) Health & Family welfare

As per 2011 census, 13 villages in the study area have 1 Primary Health Centre, 4

Primary Health Sub Centre, 1 Veterinary hospital, 1 Family Welfare Centre in study area

of 10 km. As per field survey, there are 1 primary health center, 3 sub-centers, and 10

private medical practitioners. Primary Health Centre is located at village Shiyal. There

is no any Employees' State Insurance (ESI) Hospital within the study area.

Based on above study, it is concluded that heath and family welfare facility found poor

in the study area. Unit will arrange 2-3 health checkup camp during monsoon and

provide free medicines.

3) Drinking water and Sanitation Facilities

As per 2011 census, all the villages in the study area have mainly tap water supply as a

source of drinking water. In addition to this, some of the villages have facility of Tube

well water supply, Hand Pump water facility, Well water facility, tank water facility, 3

villages have River/canal.



As per field survey, there is lack of drinking water facilities in the study areas. Many part

of study area has saline water from ground source for drinking purpose. Unit proposed

to provide RO system for drinking water in Bagodara, Gundanapara & Mithapur village

or any village suggested by local authority. Unit will contribute fund towards storage of

drinking water facility at selected villages.

It is observed that the basic amenities of separate toilet for boys and girls; and drinking

water are available in all primary schools across all villages in the study area. But in

backward areas people do not have the toilet facility available at their homes. So they

have been left with no other option except to defecate in open. Few household had got

toilet constructed under the Government Scheme but they were not in working

condition because of absence in regular supply of water or not being fully constructed.

There are inadequate drainage facilities. As a result, Dengue, Malaria and Gastro

problems are prevalent in this area. Unit will contribute fund towards the

improvement.

4) Women Empowerment activities

In some cases, women bear larger losses in terms of educational attainment,

employment and wages. In terms of employment, which is a major determinant of

livelihood, Ahmedabad rural talukas shows lower than state average in Worker

Participation Rates (WPR). There is distinct Gender disparity in WPR across all talukas,

with women substantially under-represented in main workers category.

As per 2011 census, 69.84% of female population are non-workers. 49.08% of male

population is part of main worker, while only 10.64% of female population is a part of

main workers. 5.55% of male workers are marginal workers, while 19.52% of female

workers are engaged in such type of activities. Thus, unit proposes to provide education

and training to engage more women in employment opportunities.

5) Preservation of Environment and Sustainable Development

For Preservation of Environment, unit will develop greenbelt/plantation programme in

surrounding villages. Unit will promote uses of non-conventional source of energy i.e.

solar power. Unit will contribute to develop natural composting pits which benefits to

reduce municipal solid waste and generate organic manure; which is utilize for

agriculture activity.

Need Analysis of the Target Beneficiaries in the Project Area

Various needs were identified during the baseline survey within the study area. Major

problems they are facing are given below.



Poor availability of water for irrigation and drinking purpose

Lack of good medical facilities

Unemployment

Health and sanitation program

Poor educational facilities

In the assessment of socio-economic conditions, few indicators were identified for

further attention and strategic planning as given below:

Target Project Area

Total 13 villages fall within the study area; Out of which unit will give priorities to

Bagodara, Gundanapara & Mithapur villages for CER activities according to the below

mentioned criteria. It may vary based on the outcome of the public demand during the

public hearing.

Largely affected by industrial growth

Vicinity to the project site

Sourcing of employees from these areas

Low level socio-economic status of the people

Lack of adequate intervention of voluntary organization in the area

The focus area of comprehensive program includes: health, education, sanitation,

sustainable livelihood & infrastructure development.

Details of expenditure for CER activities:

Estimated cost of the project : Rs. 261.0 Crores

Expenditure earmarked towards CER : Rs. 5.22 Crores

(2% of the project cost)

The detailed expenditure break-up of above activities for the five years are given below:

Table 7.9 Detailed expenditure for CER activities

Sr.

No.

Activities Years (Rs. in Crore) Total Budget

(Rs. in Crore) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

1 Educational facilities & trade training to educated unemployed

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1

2 Health and Family Welfare facilities 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.5

3 Drinking water and sanitation facilities 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 1.3

4 Women Empowerment activities 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.9

5 Preservation of Environment and Sustainable Development-Maintaining village ponds, encouraging rain water harvesting in village

0.12 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.52

Total 1.06 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 5.22



Tentative planning of detailed activities to be taken are as follows.

Proposed Activities Selected areas or villages Frequency

Provide Uniforms to poor

children (around 500 pairs)

Schools of Bagodara,

Gundanapara, Shiyal & Mithapur

Every year at least up

to five years

Provide Computer supplies

and furniture in schools

(as per actual requirements)

Every year up to five

years

Scholarship to poor children

(100 students)

Every year

Provide fund to renovation/

repair/ building of toilets

First priority to villages Bagodara,

Gundanapara, Shiyal & Mithapur;

then other villages in core & buffer

area


years (as per actual

requirements) Provide fund to renovation/

repair/ building of public

drinking water systems

Arrange medical camp during

the rainy season

Every year

Supply free medicines to local

PHCs/clinics

Every year (as per

actual requirements)

Tree Plantation - road side,

local school area & other

public areas (2000 trees per

year)

Villages of Bagodara,

Gundanapara, Shiyal & Mithapur


years

Rain water harvesting efforts Over a period of 5

years (as per actual

requirements) Solar panel installations in

rural areas

Miscellaneous First priority to villages in core

area and then villages in buffer

area


years

Implementation of such program will be ensured by constituting a Committee comprising

of the

i. Project proponent

ii. Representatives of village Panchayat

iii. Representative of the District Administration

Action taken report in this regard will be submitted to the Ministry’s Regional Office.



(C) PUBLIC CONSULTATION

The public hearing was conducted by GPCB on 03.11.2018 on the basis of the draft

EIA/EMP incorporating the Terms of References. Point raised during the public hearing

by participants is summarized below with reply/action taken by project proponent.

Table 7.10 Points raised during public hearing

Statement of issues raised by the public and response of the project proponent with action plan is as follows. Sr. No.

Name and Address

Point Represented Reply from Project Proponent

Time Bound Action Plan proposed

Budgetary provision

1 Shri Kanubhai M.

Makwana, Local

leader & Director

APMC, Bavla

Village: Bagodara

He informed that, earlier it was seems that there will be air pollution, there will be water pollution and wastewater from the industry would be discharged into River Bhogavo but as per the clarification given today, industry will neither discharge wastewater outside nor in into underground. Therefore, we all welcome this industry. Care should be taken that there should be no difficulty to us due to operation of this industry. Employment shall be given to local people and further informed that condition of surrounding villages is poor, hence employment shall be given to them and care must be taken for no creation of pollution and promises given today must be implemented and we welcome this industry.

Representative of project proponent has assured that, care will be taken for no creation of pollution. APCM like ESP and bag filters will be installed and efficiently operated and GPCB & CPCB norms will be maintained and assured that in the event of non-functioning of EMS, the plant will be taken under shut down.

-- --

2 Shri Rameshbhai

J. Makwana, Local

leader & Vice

chairman APMC,

Bavla

Village: Bagodara

He informed that it is my opinion

that surrounding area will get

employment due to upcoming of

this industry. It is to be assured

that there wills no problem of

pollution.

He suggested that employment

shall be given to the local people

and their health shall be

maintained, then we have no

objection for upcoming industry.

Company technical

representative has

replied that as shown in

their presentation,

employment will be

given to the local people,

training center shall also

be established and man

force will be created by

giving required training.

He further informed that, they will take suggestion from Sarpanch of surrounding villages for CSR activities and budget will be allotted for the required activities of the villages.

-- --



Chapter-8

Project Benefits

8.1 INTRODUCTION

Project benefit focus on those points which will become beneficial to the surrounding

area or community in terms of infrastructural development, social development,

employment and other tangible benefits due to project.

8.2 IMPROVEMENT IN PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

Proposed project of Genext Steels Private Limited will have requirement of an

infrastructure for its own use the benefits of which will be available to the general

public as well, so direct benefits of infrastructure development is anticipated. Thus, the

project will have considerable indirect benefits to the physical infrastructures.

8.3 IMPROVEMENT IN SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE

With the implementation of the proposed plant, the socio-economic status of the local

people will improve substantially. The project proposes to employ local people which

will help to increase the income of local people & improve their standard of living. The

construction and commissioning phase will require a substantial manpower and

resources. Hence, with the growth in the economic conditions, the project may lead to

growth in the social stature & improve of the quality of life in the surrounding area.

Social infrastructure will improve by means of civilization, vocational training and basic

amenities.

Civilization: Due to the project, employment and other infrastructural facilities will

boost up income of surrounding people and improve quality of life. This will indirectly

boost up the civilization of the surrounding people.

Vocational Training: Unit will provide vocational training opportunity to the

surrounding people and motivate the education activities that will lead to the change in

life style of the surrounding, hence, improving social infrastructure.

Basic Amenities: Unit will consider providing or improving education facilities,

healthcare, and drinking water facilities in the area, which will help in uplifting the

living standards of local communities.

8.4 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL

The proposed plant creates employment for 150-200 people during construction phase

and 500-700 people during operation phase of the project. Temporary and permanent

employment will be generated during construction phase. Unit will give first priority to



local workers for the semi-skilled and un-skilled jobs. Further, the indirect employment

via increased transportation, ancillary units & local economic activities will also add in

the employment potential of the project. Thus, the unit will result in considerable

benefits in terms of employment.

8.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES PROPOSED

Genext Steels will actively contribute to improve the Socio-economic conditions of the

area by providing assistance for local persons preferable from the nearby villages.

Detailed expenditure for CER activities

Sr. No.

Activities Years (Rs. in Crores) Total Budget (Rs. in Crore)

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 1. Educational facilities & trade training to

educated unemployed 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.0

2. Health and Family Welfare facilities 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.5 3. Drinking water and sanitation facilities 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 1.3 4. Women Empowerment activities 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.9 5. Preservation of Environment and

Sustainable Development-Maintaining village ponds, encouraging rain water harvesting in village

0.12 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.52

Total 1.06 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 5.22 Grand Total 5.22

8.5.1 How to utilize Corporate Environment Responsibility Funds

Distinct CER projects shall be prepared on the local conditions/public hearing

issues. A major have been defined above but more can be included as would be

decided by the Panchayats, GPCB, Project Proponent, in consultation with the

Administration.

Project estimate will be prepared based on PWD schedule rates for each distinct

Item and schedule for time-bound action plan will be prepared.

These CER projects as indicated by the project proponent shall be implemented

simultaneously along with the main project.

Implementation of such program shall be ensured by constituting a Committee

comprising of the-

i. Project proponent

ii. Representatives of village Panchayat

iii. Representative of the District Administration

Action taken report in this regard shall be submitted to the Ministry’s Regional

Office.

No free distribution/donations and or free camps shall be included as a part of the

above CER budget.



8.6 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS

As mentioned above, the project will have many employment & trade opportunities,

which will eventually result in appreciable economic benefits to the local people &

businesses/contractors. Indirectly, the project will help the Government by paying

different taxes from time to time, which is a part of revenue and thus, will help in

developing the area.

The project will ensure the most useful products available in the market which

wherever would be used will have its own positive benefits all around. The project will

make use of many raw materials like iron ore, coal, bentonite, dolomite, consumables

and also procure a large number of equipment of large value from the industry from all

over India, everywhere it will have positive impact like those mentioned above in

series.



Chapter-9

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

As per EIA Notification 2006, this Chapter of the ‘Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis’ is

applicable only if it is recommended at the Scoping stage. As per the ToR issued by MoEF&CC,

New Delhi vide F. No. IA-J-11011/501/2017-IA-II(I), dated 19th June, 2018, the

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis is not applicable and hence has not been prepared.



Chapter-10

Environment Management Plan

10.1 INTRODUCTION

Assessment of environmental and social impacts arising due to implementation of the

project activities is the technical heart of EIA process. An equally essential element of

this process is to develop measures to eliminate, offset or reduce impacts to acceptable

levels during implementation and operation of projects. The integration of such

measures into project implementation and operation is supported by clearly defining

the environmental requirements within an Environment Management Plan (EMP).

Environmental Management includes protection/mitigation/enhancement measures as

well as suggesting post project monitoring programme.

The EMP of Genext Steels Private Limited (Henceforth Genext) has been formulated

considering all necessary mitigation measures to prevent/minimize/eliminate

environmental impacts associated with the proposed activities. Genext will develop an

Environment Management Cell to keep a close watch on the performance of the

pollution control equipments, emissions from the sources and the quality of

surrounding environment in accordance with the monitoring program.

OBJECTIVE OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

The EMP is prepared with the main objective of enlisting all the requirements to ensure

effective mitigation of adverse impacts for all the components of the proposed project.

The key objectives of the Environment Management Plan are,

To limit/reduce the degree, extent, magnitude or duration of adverse impacts,

To treat all the pollutants i.e. liquid effluent, air emissions and hazardous waste

with adoption of adequate and efficient technology,

To reduce risk/hazards and design the disaster management plan,

To enhance improvement of environment performance,

To make budgetary provision and allocation of funds for environment

management system and for timely revision of budgetary provisions.

10.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Construction phase results in temporary environmental pollution except for the

permanent change in local land use pattern &aesthetics in certain cases. Such pollution

is mainly due to site preparation, civil works, transportation, storage & handling of

construction materials, sanitation of construction workers etc. These are usually short-



term impacts.The project proponent willtake appropriate steps to control pollution

during construction phase.

10.2.1 Air and Noise Environment

During construction work,air pollution is expected in the form of increased suspended

particulate matter concentration. Installation work will generate noise and dust, but it

will be within working areas. Vehicular movement in the premises will also generate

dust.

To mitigate the impact, following measures will be taken:

Regular sprinkling of the water will be done and the roads will be periodically

leveled with bulldozers to keep roads ditch free.

Regular preventing maintenance of machinery and transportation vehicles will be

carried out.

Provision of silencer to noise generating machines, if required, and

Noise protection devices such as earmuffs/earplugs will be provided to workers

working in noisy area.

10.2.2 Water supply & sanitation

During construction phase, water will be provided to workers for their requirement &

for construction activity. Water supply will be met from ground water source and/or

through tankers. Portable sanitation facilities will be provided to maintain proper

standards of hygiene. These facilities would preferably be connected to a septic tank

and shall be maintained properly to have least environmental impact.

10.2.3 Waste

The solid waste shall be collected and disposed off as per the norms.

10.2.4 Socio-Economic Environment

The proposed manpowerrequirement during construction will be 150-

200nos.Unitgives preference to local people through both direct and indirect

employment.

10.2.5 Health and Safety

Adequate rest area will be provided to the construction workers, casual workers, and

truck drivers. Unit will also supply potable water and portable sanitation facilities for

all the workers. The safety department will supervise the safe working of the contractor

and their employees.Work spots will be maintained clean, provided with optimum

lighting and enough ventilation to eliminate dust/fumes.Vertical deep excavation work



will not be carried out but will be done with a proper slant to avoid any causality due to

the excavations yielding or sagging.

10.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT DURING THE OPERATIONAL PHASE

EMP proposed for implementation is detailed under the following heads:

Air Pollution Management

Wastewater Management

Solid &Hazardous Waste Management

Noise Control

Greenbelt Development

Occupational Safety and Health

Implementation of EMP and monitoring programme

10.3.1 Air Pollution Control

10.3.1.1 Source of Air Pollution and Control Measures

The following pollution control systems are proposed in steel plant.

Sr. No.

Source Air pollution control equipment Probable pollutants

1. Pellet plant Bag filter PM <50 mg/NM3


2. DRI Kiln Electro Static Precipitators (ESP) PM <50 mg/NM3

3. SMS plant Fume Extraction system with bag filters PM <50 mg/NM3

4. Power plant

Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) PM <30 mg/NM3

Apart from the above,fume extraction system with bag filters, dust suppression system;

covered conveyers etc. will also be installed.

The flue gases from the Pellet plant will be controlled by Bag Filters and then

discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 31.0 m height.

Flue gases from Rotary kiln of DRI plant will be passedthrough Electro Static

Precipitators (ESPs) and then discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 48.0 m

height.

Flue gases from DRI plant will be passed through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler and after

heat recovery; the gases will be treated in High efficiency ESPs to bring down the

particulate emissionin the exhaust gases to below 30 mg/Nm3 and then discharged into

the atmosphere through stack of 75.0 m height.

The fugitive emissions from the Induction furnaces will be sucked through adequately

designed suction hoods and will pass through a fume extraction system with bag filters

and then the treated gases will be discharged into the atmosphere through 4 nos. of



stacks each of 30.0m height for effective dispersion of emissions from Induction

Furnaces. The outlet dust emission in the exhaust gases will be less than 50 mg/Nm3.

The dust will be pneumatically carried to covered bins.The flue gases from the FBC

boiler will be treated in a high efficiency ESP to bring down the particulate emission to

less than 30 mg/Nm3 and will be discharged through a stack of 30.0 m height for

effective dispersion of emissions into the atmosphere.

Furthermore, facility for sampling such as ladder, platform, and sampling point will be

provided as per the GPCB guidelines.

Air Pollution Control Measures of Production Facilities

Sr. No.

Plant/Section Pollution sources Pollutant emissions

Mitigation measures

1 Raw Materials Handling Section (RMHS)

Open stockpiles, blending& blending yard, conveyor transportation for all production facilities Closed area crushing/screening bunkers loading

Fugitive dusts Fugitive dusts

Water sprinkling, covered conveyors, dry fogging at transfer points Bag filter based Dust Extraction (DE) system

2 Kiln of Pellet plant Kiln waste gas generated from fuel burning

SO2, NOx, Dusts Bag filters

3 Rotary Kiln of DRI Plant

Kiln waste gas SO2, NOx, Dusts ESP

4 DRI Plant -process area cleaning vents

Secondary emissions from Rotary Kiln

Dusts Bag Filter

5 SMS Secondary emissions at the time of charging of sponge Iron

Dusts/fumes

Fume Extraction system with bag filters

6 Captive Power Plant

Flue gas NOx, Dusts ESP & low NOx burner

10.3.1.2 Action plan for control of fugitive emission

Fugitive emission is expected duringstorage, handling, and conveying of coal, iron ore

and other raw material, material transfer point. Dust will be generated during loading &

unloading, transportation of material through conveyor. In addition to this, charging

point of scrap in furnace is another major source of fugitive emission. There will also

chances of generation of fugitive emission from vehicular movement in the premises.

Unit will adopt following measures to control fugitive emission,

Dust suppression system (water sprinklers) will be provided in coal unloading

area,



Dust suction system will be provided to control fugitive emission generated

from melting of scrap,

Bag filter will be provided for the extraction of dust particles to the stack

attached with induction furnace,

The Continuous Casting Operation is selected for the production of billets in

induction furnace to reduce the gaseous emission,


dust during conveying. The dust from covered conveyers will be sucked and

cleaned in APC system,

All production shop having high heat emission in them will be designed for

natural ventilation to make use of draft created by the density difference and

selecting effective roof monitors suitable for this purpose,

All internal roads will be asphalted/concreted to prevent fugitive dust emission

due to vehicular movement.

PPEs will be provided to the workers,

Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) will be provided to bring down the PM to 50

mg/Nm3 for DRI plant and 30 mg/Nm3for Power plant,

Fly ash will be stored in covered sheds only,

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant, and

Frequent work area monitoring will be done to ensure fugitive emissions level.

10.3.2 Water Environment

Total water requirement of the project will be 1018 KLD; Out of 1018 KLD, 905 KLD

fresh water required and 113 KLD recycle water from wastewater/domestic water.This

includes water for Pellet Plant, DRI plant, Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill, Power Plant,

domestic, greenbelt and ash & dust suppression. Water requirement of the project will

be sourced from Ground water. Water drawl permission from CGWA is under process,

refer Annexure-II of EIA report.

Effluent Management

There will be no wastewater generation from the pellet, DRI, SMS & Rolling Mill

processes, as closed-circuit cooling system will be provided.

Only source of wastewater generation will be cooling tower bleed off, boiler

blow down & DM plant regeneration and sewage.



Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after ensuring compliance

with SPCB norms, partly utilized for slag cooling & partly sent to RO followed by

MEE.

Sewage will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and treated water will

be utilized for Greenbelt development.

ETP, STP, RO and MEE will be installed with adequate capacity and operate

efficiently to maintain discharge norms. In any case EMS system will not work

properly; immediate action will be taken to rectify it.

Effluent Treatment Scheme (Power Plant)

pH of the boiler blow down will be between 9.5 to 10.5. Hence a neutralization tank will

be constructed for neutralizing the effluent of boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration

water. After neutralization, these two effluent streams will be mixed with Cooling

Tower bleed off in a Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). Then, part of the effluent will be

directly reused for slag cooling (15 KLD) and part of it (95 KLD) will be passed through

RO. RO eject will be taken to Multi Effect Evaporator (MEE). RO permeate (75 KLD) and


plant premises. Hence, unit will achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD). Sewage will be

treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and treated water will be utilized for

Greenbelt development.

Treated effluent disposal

Total effluent generation from project: 110 m3/day

(Excluding sewage)

Effluent quantity to be used for slag cooling: 15 m3/day

RO permeate to be used for utility: 75.0 m3/day

MEE condensate to be used for utility: 18.0 m3/day

1.5KLD system loss and 0.5 TPD salt generation from MEE

Details of ETP units

Sr. No. Unit Dimension Capacity (m3)

1 Collection Tank 5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5

(4.0 WD)

110.25

2 Neutralization tank 2.5 x 2.5 x 3.5

(3.0 WD)

18.75

3 Settling tank 8 x 4 x 2.5

(1.5 SD)

Surface area32 m2

4 Treated effluent

sump/basin

5.25 x 5.25 x 4.5

(4.0 WD)

110.25



5 Sludge Drying bed 10 x 5 x 1.5 Surface area50 m2

6 RO 2 set 5 m3/hr. each

7 MEE 1 1 m3/hr.

10.3.3 Hazardous&Solid Waste Management

Hazardous waste generation:

Main source of hazardous waste generation will be ETP sludge (5.0 MT/month), MEE

salt (13 MT/month), used lubricating oil (5.0 Kl/year), discarded drums/containers

(500 nos./month).

Hazardous waste Management:



MEE salt will be disposed to approve TSDF site for landfilling. Used oil will be sold to

registered re-processors. Discarded Drums/containers will be sold to registered




The solid wastes generation includes fly ash, Dolochar, Mill scalesand slag.

Solid waste Management:

Ash will be sold to brick manufacturers. Dolochar will be used in FBC power plant as

fuel/brick manufacturing. Slag after crushing and iron removal, used in road


Details of Solid and hazardous waste disposal are given comprehensively in Chapter 2

(Table 2.11).

Storage and Transportation of Solid/Hazardous Waste:

Proper Hazardous waste storage area with impervious flooring and covered shed

will be provided for storage of solid &hazardous waste.

Entire quantity of the solid &hazardous waste will be stored in the isolated

hazardous waste storage area within premises having leachate collection system

and roof cover. The storage yard shall be properly labeled for identification of

wastes.

Solid &Hazardous waste shall not be stored for a period more than 90 days. Records

of the same shall be maintained and make them available for inspection.

Properly packed & labeled hazardous waste shall be transported through dedicated

vehicle to authorized TSDF facility.



10.3.4 Noise Control

Unit proposes following noise control measures to minimize the impact of noise on the

environment during the operational phase,

All equipments proposed to be usedwill be of internationally reputed make.

As a precautionary measure, enclosures will be provided wherever possible for all

the major mechanical units to arrest the sound waves travelling outside the plant

area.

Silencers, anti-vibration pad, acoustic enclosure to equipment will be provided.

The air compressor, process air blower, pneumatic valves etc., will be provided with

acoustic enclosure

Acoustic enclosure will be provided to turbines.

Ear muff, ear plug will be provided to all workers working at noisy area.

The ambient noise levels will be less than 75 dB(A) during day time & less than 70

dB(A) during night time. Hence, there will not be any adverse impact on habitations

due to the proposed activities.

Adequate greenbelt will be developed within industrial premises and around the

periphery to prevent the noise pollution.

Periodic monitoring of noise levels as per post-project monitoring plan shall be

done on regular basis.

By taking measures as mentioned above, it is anticipated that noise levels in the plant

will be maintained below the permissible limit.

10.3.5 Green Belt Development

Tree plantation is one of the effective remedial measures to control the air pollution

and noise pollution. The objectives of the industrial greenbelt are to improve the micro-

environment. It also causes aesthetics improvement of the area as well as sustains and

supports the biosphere.The unit proposed to develop greenbelt in area of 50500 m2,

which will be 33% of the total area of the project.

Design of Green Belt

As far as possible, following guidelines will be considered in greenbelt development.

The spacing between the trees will be maintained as per SPCB guideline i.e. 1

tree/4 sq. m.

Spaces, so that the trees may grow vertically and slightly increase the effective

height of the greenbelt.

Planting of trees in each row will be in staggered orientation.



The short trees (< 10 m height) will be planted in the first two rows (towards

plant side) of the green belt. The tall trees (> 10 m height) will be planted in the

outer three rows (away from plant side).

Planting methodology

The plantation shall be done in pits. The pit shall be refilled with soil after the planting.

The sampling of healthy, nursery raised, seedlings in polythene containers shall be

transported in baskets. Planting shall be done after first monsoon showers.The level of

soil is about 10 cm above of ground level. The soil around the plant shall be pressed to

form a low trough. About 25 gm chemical fertilizers shall be added. Watering shall be

continued after plantation if any dry spells follows. Planted area shall be inspected and

mortality rate ensured for each species. The dead and drying plant shall be replaced by

fresh seedlings.

Selection of species for greenbelt

For the development of greenbelt, plants having simple big leaves and native species

are preferred.The plant species will be considered based on following:

The plant should be fast growing.

It should have thick canopy cover.

It should be perennial and evergreen.

It should have large leaf area index.

It should be indigenous.

It should be efficient in absorbing pollutants without significant effects on plant

growth.

It is also advisable to select suitable tree species and adopt simple techniques which

require minimum investment and care.

Floral species recommended for greenbelt

Azadirachtaindica (Neem), Albizialebbeck (Siris), Pongamiapinnata (Karanj),

Ficusreligiosa (Peepal)are suggested for the greenbelt development with respect to this

particular area. They are mostly deciduous and evergreen tree types suitable to grow in

the area.

Survival rate of trees and post plantation care

Considering the availability of water and general survey of surrounding area, the

survival rate is expected to be around 70-75%. Moreover, the wire net guards will be

provided to protect the saplings. The same will be properly manured and watered so

that it can grow well.



Protection of plantation site:

Protection from grazing will be done by erecting tree guards around planted

sapling.

Though the tree suggested for plantation will require very less water, however

during the first year watering will be done twice in a day. There after watering will

be done twice in a week.

The manuring will be done when plantation take up. For this propose cow dung will

be dump in the pit. No other manuring will be required for proposed plantation.

Cow dung is easily available in the study area.

Organic manure and chemical free herbal pesticide will be used.

Damaged plants will be replaced with new plants.

Strict surveillance will be made to increase the survival rate of the trees.

10.3.6 Occupational health hazard and mitigation measures

In operational phase of the project, various effects on occupational health and safety of

the employees working in the plant are envisaged. Major health and safety issues

encountered will be physical hazards, respiratory hazards, electrical hazards, noise, fire

hazards associated while working within the plant.

Possible occupational health hazards are given below

Workers gets exposed to high temperatures which ultimately leads to fatigue and

dehydration posing severe negative impact on human health.

Workers also exposed to high noise level in areas namely scarp loading/unloading,

scrap sorting and scrap charging into furnace.

Contact with hot metal or hot water may result in severe burns.

Dust generated in such type of project includes metallic dusts which are present in

melting, casting and finishing activity.

Dust generated due to high temperature operations, fine particle size and

metallurgical fumes create serious occupational inhalation risk and burning of

eyes.

Lifting and moving heavy loads at elevated heights using hydraulic platforms and

cranes presents a significant physical hazard to the workers working in such

project.

Other occupational impacts associated with the project are injuries related to

handling and cutting activities associated with the use of metal scarp.



Handling of liquid metal may generate risk of explosion, melt run-out and burns in

addition to fires caused by melted metal.

Proposed Mitigation Measures:

Following mitigation measures for preventionand control of various occupational

hazards associated with the plant operations are as follows:

Clear signage in all working areas

Implementation of specific load handling and lifting procedures

Train staff in handling of lifting equipment, working at height, handling molten

metal, working with electrical systems

Provide training to workers in the hazards related with working in hot

environment, adopting safe work practices, control measures and the use &

maintenance of personal protective equipments

Proper handling and shielding of moving hot liquids, as well as solid metal parts

Material and product handling shall remain within restricted zones under

supervision

Conduct regular maintenance of all the mechanical equipments

Shield surfaces where close contact with hot equipment or splashing from hot

materials is expected like induction melting ladles and casting etc.

Necessary PPEs, safety equipment will be provided to employees to ensure healthy

& safe work conditions

Regular inspection for PPEs & Safety equipment/material will be done

The proponent shall ensure implementation of emergency management plan with

provision of fire-fighting equipment/facilities, first aid & medical facilities,

evacuation procedures etc.

All incoming scrap shall be tested prior to use as feed stock material to prevent

entry of any device containing explosives.

Exhaust ventilation shall be installed at the significant point sources of dust and gas

emissions.

Implement a policy for periodical personal health checks

Organize regular mock drills for unsafe situations.

Workers getting exposed to high heat reaction should have showering ventilation

devices in all radiating heat zones of adequate capacity.

With effective implementation of the mitigation measures suggested, the occupational

health and safety impacts can be controlled.



10.3.6.1 Personal Protective Equipment

Table 10.1 List of PPEs

Protection Type of PPE Qty.

Head protection Helmet 750 nos.

Hand protection Asbestos Gloves 500 pairs

Electric Hand 100 pairs

Foot protection Safety shoes 750 pairs

Gum boots 500 pairs

Heat protection Fire suit 10 nos.

Working at height Safety belts 10 Sets

Hearing Protection Ear plug 150 pairs

Ear muff 150 pairs

Eye protection Goggles 750 nos.

Face shield 75 nos.

Respiratory protection Dust mask 750 nos.

10.3.6.2 Plans for Periodic Medical Checkup

Part time doctor will be appointed for health check-up of each employee.

Pre-employment health check-up will be followed by periodical health check-up

with special attention to occupational health.

Medical records of each employee will be maintained in prescribed format as per

Factory Act.

The health check-up will be conducted as per the pre-designed format which will

include chest X-rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision Testing, ECG, Blood and urine

test etc.

The work zone monitoring will be conducted on regular basis.

Monitoring of the Occupational Injury & Its Impact on workers

The action plan will be prepared to monitor the injury to workers:

Each workplace will be evaluated for the existing work conditions.

Unsafe Act &unsafe practices will be identified.

Unsafe equipment, unsafe areas, etc., will be identified.

Area will be checked for proper Ventilation and Illumination.

Evaluation of training & on the job work.

Impact of the above mentioned unsafe conditions on workers will be studied and

remedial measures for the same will be adopted.



10.4 POST-PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

The highlights of the integrated environmental monitoring plan are:

The stack monitoring facilities like ladder, platform and port-hole of all the stacks

maintained in good condition.

Regular monitoring of all gaseous emissions from stacks &fugitive emissions in the

process areas.

The performance of air pollution control equipmentswill be evaluated based on

these monitoring results.

Water consumption in the unit recorded daily.

Analysis of effluent will be carried out regularly.

Performance of effluent treatment plant units, RO and MEEwill be evaluated based

on above analysis results.

Regular noise level monitoring carried out.

Greenbelt properly maintained and new plantation programmes undertaken

frequently.

Continued environmental awareness programmes carried out within the employees

and also in the surrounding villages.

Locations and frequency of monitoring as per the guidelines of SPCB and MoEF&CC are

tabulated below.

Table 10.2 Environment Monitoring Plan

Nature of Analysis Frequency of analysis with its analyzer

Parameters No. of samples

Wastewater analysis Monthly by external agency

pH, TDS, SS, COD, BOD, Oil & Grease, etc.

2-3 samples

Stack Monitoring Monthly by external agency

PM, SO2, NOX All stacks

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Monthly for 24 hours or as per the statutory conditions by external

agency

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX

3-5 locations

Noise level Monthly as per the statutory conditions by

external agency

Noise level 8-10 locations

Fugitive emission monitoring

Monthly by external agency

PM 10-12 locations

Health check-up of workers

As per the statutory guideline

All workers



10.5 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT BUDGET ALLOCATION

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum earmarked for environment pollution

control measureswill be as under.

Table 10.3 Budget Allocation for Environment Management

Sr.

No.

Particulars Capital Cost (Rs. in Lakhs)

Recurring Cost per annum

(Rs. in Lakh)

1 Air Pollution Control 3112 425

2 Water Pollution Control 450 170

3 Noise Pollution Control 45 10

4 Solid/Hazardous Waste Management 300 140

5 Environment Monitoring and Management

15 15

6 Occupational Health 10 10

7 Green Belt Development Plan 38 25

8 Rain Water Harvesting System 30 5

Total 4000 800

10.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL

Genextwill set up separate Environment Management Cell (EMC) to implementation of

all the mitigation measures.The project proponent shall provide a fully equipped

laboratory to carry out the analysis.

The major duties & responsibilities of EMC will be as follows:

To implement the Environmental Management Plan,

To ensure regular operation &maintenance of pollution control devices,

To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules&regulations,

To minimize environmental impacts by strict adherence to the EMP,

To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule,

Review & interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in case

monitored results are above the specified limit,

Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable

environmental laws as ready reference,

Maintain environmental related records,

Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants and monitoring

laboratories, and

Maintaining log of public complaints and the action taken.

10.6.1 Hierarchical Structure of Environmental Management Cell

The hierarchical structure of Genextis given below:



Figure 10.1: Environment Management Cell

10.6.2 Reporting System of Non-Compliances/Violations of Environmental Norms

Record keeping and reporting of performance is an important management tool for

ensuring sustainable operation of the unit. Records are maintained for regulatory,

monitoring and operational issues.

The mechanism is summarized below:

1. Identify deviation/non-compliance/violation of environmental norms as lay down

in consent to operate and EC. Record to communication/complain received from

plausible stake holder.

2. The EHS manager will identify deviation/non-compliance/violation from failure to

comply with statutory requirements.

3. Respond from EHS manager within reasonable time limit to concern authorities

with c/c mark to Technical head.

4. Technical head will take it in action and give necessary guideline to comply this

deviation/non-compliance/violation of environmental norms. Parallel arrange

budget for necessary action to comply the condition.

5. Communication received from the EHS manager will be discussed in technical

management meeting.

6. Board discussion, Decision and Action

The chairperson will review the information available and take a decision

depending on the seriousness of the violation.

Director - Project

Environment Engineer

Manager (EHS)

ETP/RO/MEE incharge

ETP operator

Safety

Officer

Vice President - Project

Incharge of

APC system



The decision will be taken to ensure the compliance of non-

compliance/violation of environmental norms and it’s safeguarded. The

decision will be taken by consensus and if no consensus is arrived at, voting

will be conducted.

Enlist measures that would undertake to ensure that deviations/ non-

compliance/violations of Environmental normsdo not occur again in future.

10.6.3 Framework for Continual Improvement of Environmental Performance of

Organization

10.7 RESOURCE CONSERVATION AND CLEANER PRODUCTION

Steps that are undertaken by the industry are given below:

Integrated plant technology will conserve around 30% of energy by way of direct

hot material/mass transfer from one process to another process.

Waste Heat will be utilized for power generations which also reduce fuel cost

around 25%.

RO permeate and MEE condensate will be reused to reduce fresh water demand.

Housekeeping will be regularly maintained. Dedicated staff for the purpose will be

employed.

Solid wastes e.g. powders, spills, etc. in process and packaging are to be separately

collected and disposed of instead of allowing these to effluent streams. This will

reduce load to treatment and increase the efficiency of treatment system.

Dust extraction system will be provided for reduction of fugitive emissions and

leakages.

Rain water harvesting system will be adopted to reduce the fresh water

requirement.

EMP

Implementation

Monitoring as

per EMP

requirement

Internal and

External Audits Corrective and

Preventive Actions

Review and revision of EMP

based on Environmental

Performance Evaluation Improvement

Mitigation

measures



10.8 ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMME

Energy conservation measures are often the easiest, quickest and cheapest way to

reduce costs and be environmentally pro-active. The conservation efforts would consist

of the following:

Ensure proper selection fuel-firing equipments - Burners, mechanical stokers, etc.

Reduce radiation losses from boilers, furnaces and auxiliary equipment by

improved thermal insulation. This will also improve the working conditions

within the building and eliminate unnecessary ventilation,

Schedule process operations to avoid fluctuations in boiler loads,

Keep the heat transfer surfaces clean by preventing excessive scale formation,

Pressure vessels should be designed with a length to diameter ratio of roughly

three as they are the most economical,

Maximize the use of natural lighting through design,

CFLs or LED lights are used in administration building and plant premises,

Ensure natural ventilation of hot industrial buildings and to take advantage of

internal heat to produce natural draft to conserve energy of the mechanical

equipments,

Constant monitoring of energy consumption and defining targets for energy

conservation,

Maximize the use of laptop computers over desk top computers as Laptops use

less energy than desk tops and leave a smaller environmental footprint at end of

life,

Adjusting the settings and illumination levels to ensure minimum energy used for

desired comfort levels,

Recycling of water will be done,

Training to staffs on methods of energy conservation.

10.9 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) refers to voluntary actions undertaken by

company/organization either to improve the living conditions (economically, socially,

environmentally) of local communities or to reduce the negative effects of the project.

Socio-economic development activities is a concept of organization whereby

organizations serve the interests of society by taking responsibility for the impact of

their activities on customers, employees, shareholders, communities and the

environment in all aspects of their operations.



Genext Steels will actively contribute to improve the Socio-economic conditions of the

area by providing assistance to local persons preferable from the nearby villages. The

continuing commitment by business to behave ethically and contribute to economic

development while improve the quality of life of workforce and their families as well as

that of the local community and society at large. Socio economic study provides

direction for the Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) activities and gives clear

picture about the areas of intervention for the improvement by CER activities to the

project proponent. Based on the primary study and secondary data of the socio–

economic condition for 13villages within 10 km radius of the project site, the following

socio-economic development activities under Corporate Environment Responsibility

(CER) programme are suggested/recommended.

Socio Economic Survey within study area is prescribing in chapter-7 of EIA report.

Based on the SIA study, outcomes are health, education, sanitation, sustainable

livelihood & infrastructure development in the Target Project Area for CER activities.

This may vary depending upon public demand during Public Hearing.

Details of proposed expenditure for CER activities:

Estimated cost of the project : Rs. 261.0 Crores

Expenditure earmarked towards CER : Rs. 5.22Crores

(2% of the project cost)

The detailed expenditure break-up of above activities for the five years are given in

below table:

Table 10.4Detailed expenditure for CER activities

Sr. No.

Activities Years (Rs. in Crores) Total Budget (Rs. in Crore) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

1. Educational facilities& trade training to educated unemployed youth

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.0

2. Health and Family Welfare facilities

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.5

3. Drinking water and sanitation facilities

0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 1.3

4. Women Empowerment activities 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.9

5. Preservation of Environment and Sustainable Development-Maintaining village ponds, encouraging rain water harvesting in villages

0.12 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.52

Total 1.06 1.04 1.04 1.04 1.04 5.22

Grand Total 5.22



Chapter-11

Summary & Conclusion

11.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

11.1.1 General Introduction

M/s. Genext Steels Private Limited is a Greenfield project, proposes establishment of

mini integrated steel plant with captive power plant. It comprises of Pellet plant

(Pellets – 800 TPD), DRI Kilns (Sponge Iron - 600 TPD), Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets –

1000 TPD), Rolling Mill (Structural Steel, TMT Bars & Rolled products – 975 TPD),

Power Generation–12 MW [7 MW through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB) and 5

MW through Fluidized Bed Combustion (FBC) Boiler].

Project activity falls under item 3(a), categorized as Category ‘A’ project as per the

Schedule of EIA Notification, 2006 and its subsequent amendments.

11.1.2 Project location and Environment Sensitivity

Features Details

Location Vill: Bagodara, Tehsil: Bavla, Dist: Ahmedabad

Coordinates of Centre of the project site

Latitude: 22°37’35.22”N Longitude: 72° 9’48.72”E


Topography Plain


Nearest






Air Port Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel International Airport, Ahmedabad, about 67.0 km towards NE direction


Reserve Forests/National Park/Wildlife Sanctuary



Historical/Archaeological place None within 10 km radius, Lothal is at distance of 15.0 km towards SE direction



11.1.3 Salient features of the project

Proposed production capacity Integrated steel project with captive power plant

Plot Area 37.82 Acre (153061 m2)

Proposed project cost Rs. 261 Crores

Manpower requirement About 500-700 persons

Power Requirement 57 MW, Source: Captive power plant & State Grid -

Gujarat State Electricity Corporation Limited

Water Requirement Total: 1018 KLD; Fresh water: 905 KLD; Source of water: Bore well

Wastewater Generation Industrial: 110 KLD, ZLD

Domestic: 20 KLD

Fuel Requirement Imported Coal: 728 TPD

Dolochar: 100 TPD

HSD for all D.G. Sets: 410 lit/hr.

Source of Air Emission Pellet plant (4 stacks of 4 nos. of kiln & 4 stacks of 4 nos. of D G Sets), DRI plant (4 stacks of 4 nos. of rotary kiln & 4 stacks of 4 nos. of D G Sets), SMS plant (4 stacks of 4 nos. of induction furnace & 4 stacks of 4 nos. of D G Sets), Power plant (stacks of WHRB & FBC boiler)

Details of Haz. Waste Haz. waste: ETP sludge, MEE Salt, used Oil, Discarded drums/containers Solid waste: SMS slag, ash from boiler & APCD

11.1.4 Investment of the project

Estimated cost of the proposed project will be around Rs. 261.0 crores. Out of this, Rs.

40.0 crores will be earmarked as capital investment for EMS and Rs. 8.0 crores will be

recurring/operating cost per annum.

11.1.5 List of products

Product details with its capacity are given in table below.

Sr. No.


Production Capacity



3 Steel Melting Shop MS Billets Induction furnace: 4 x 25

MT/heat CCM: Eight-strand billet

caster

1000 TPD


products

2 x 500 TPD 975 TPD

5 Power Plant

A WHRB Electricity 1 x 7 MW 7 MW




Following raw materials will be used in proposed steel plant.

Unit Description

Pellet Manufacturing of pellet using iron ore/iron oxide (mill scale),

bentonite, and imported coal as raw materials

DRI Kiln Manufacturing of Sponge Iron using pellet, imported coal, dolomite

as raw materials

Induction Furnace Manufacturing of MS Billets using Sponge Iron, M S Scrap, Ferro

Alloys as raw materials

Rolling Mill Manufacturing of Rolled Product using Billets

Power plant By utilizing hot waste flue gases from DRI kilns in WHRB.

By utilizing Coal & Dolochar in FBC boiler as fuel.

11.2 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

11.2.1 Baseline Environmental Study

To predict the impact of the project on the surrounding environment, the current

baseline environmental status was studied by collecting the data and carrying out

monitoring during January, 2018 to March, 2018 in the study area of 10 km radius

from project site as per the TOR.

11.2.2 Air Environment

The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at 8 AAQM locations, to assess the

existing sub-regional air quality status during the period of January, 2018 to March,

2018.

Combined Sampler along with the analytical methods, prescribed by CPCB was used for

carrying out air quality monitoring. At all these sampling locations; PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and

NOx were monitored on 24-hourly basis to enable the comparison with ambient air

quality standards prescribed by the CPCB. The data on concentrations of various

pollutants were processed for different statistical parameters like arithmetic mean,

standard deviation, minimum and maximum concentration and various percentile

values. The results are summarized below:

Particulate Matter (PM10) An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM10 values at all the locations varied

between 59.7 – 73.4 g/m3 and 63.4 – 77.1 g/m3, which are well within the stipulated

standard of CPCB, 100 g/m3.

Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly PM2.5 values at all the locations varied

between 32.6 – 41.3 g/m3 and 37.0 – 45.2 g/m3, which are well within the stipulated

standard of CPCB, 60 g/m3.



Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly SO2 value of arithmetic mean at all

the locations ranged between 10.9 – 15.8 g/m3 and 12.0 – 17.8 g/m3 respectively,

which are well within the stipulated standards of 80 g/m3.

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

An average and 98th percentile value of 24-hourly NOx value of arithmetic mean at all

the locations ranged between 13.6 - 19.6 g/m3 and 15.1 -24.2 g/m3 respectively,

which are much lower than the standards stipulated by CPCB, i.e. 80 g/m3.

Conclusion:

The quality of ambient air in the study area is compared with AAQM Standards

prescribed by CPCB & found below the prescribed standards.

11.2.3 Water Environment

Six surface water & eight ground water samples were collected during the study period.

Surface Water Quality

Surface water samples were collected from ponds of Bagodara, Gundanapara, Rohika,

Mithapur, Shiyal and Dhingda Village. Results of the same are given in Chapter-3 of EIA

report.

Conclusion:

It was observed that all the physico-chemical parameters and heavy metals from

surface water samples, except turbidity in all samples and TDS in Rohika village, are

below stipulated drinking water standards and selected source are suitable for

domestic purposes.

Ground Water Quality

Ground water samples have been collected from Project Site, Bagodara, Sarala, Rohika,

Shiyal, Gundanapara, Mithapur, Jansali.

The summary of the analysis is as below:

Color: All the samples were found color less meeting desirable norms.

pH: All the samples meet the desirable standards (pH ranges from 7.5-7.9).

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS): TDS in samples ranges from 1963 mg/L (Bagodara) to

2948 mg/L (Jansali), all the samples exceed the permissible limit of 2000 mg/L, except

Bagodara village, which is almost close to permissible limit.

Calcium: Calcium contents in the water ranges from 68 mg/L (Sarala) to 109 mg/L

(Shiyal), all the samples meet the permissible limit of 200 mg/L (Permissible Limit in




Magnesium: Magnesium content in the water ranges from 37 mg/L (Shiyal) to 52 mg/L

(Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible limit of 100 mg/L (Permissible

Limit in the Absence of Alternate Source).

Sulfate: Sulfate content in the water ranges from 104 mg/L (Bagodara) to 204 mg/L

(Jansali). All the samples meet the permissible limit of 400 mg/L (Permissible Limit in


Fluoride: Fluoride content in the water ranges from 0.63 mg/L (Shiyal & Jansali) to

0.72 mg/L (Project Site). All the samples meet the permissible limit (1.5 mg/L).

Total Alkalinity: Total alkalinity in the water samples ranges from 349 mg/L (Sarala &

Rohika) to 410 mg/L (Project site). All the samples are within the permissible limit of

drinking water (600 mg/L) (Permissible Limit in the Absence of Alternate Source).

Other Parameters: Potassium (ranges from 42 mg/L to 103 mg/L), Sodium (ranges

from 622 mg/L to 1002 mg/L) and Chloride (ranges from 958 mg/L to 1486 mg/L).

Chlorides in all the samples exceed the permissible limit of 1000 mg/L, except

Bagodara village.

Heavy metals like cadmium, copper, lead, chromium, iron and zinc are well below the

limit in all samples.

Conclusion:

The results have been compared with the drinking water quality standards specified in

IS: 10500-2012. All the samples meet the permissible limit set by the authority (BIS)

except TDS and Chloride. TDS & Chlorides in all the samples exceed the permissible

limit of 2000 mg/L & 1000 mg/L respectively, except Bagodara village.

11.2.4 Noise Environment

Noise monitoring has been conducted at ten locations in the study area. The Leq (Ld)

values of noise levels during day-time varies from 50.0 to 56.6 dB(A) and the night time

Leq (Ln) varies from 40.6 to 45.9 dB(A) within the study area. Higher noise value of

56.6 dB(A) was recorded during day time Nr. Bus stop Bagodara & lower noise value of

40.6 dB(A) was recorded during night time at Primary School Shiyal.

11.2.5 Soil Quality

Soil samples were collected from 8 different locations and analyzed to assess the soil

quality prevailing in the study area. Physical characteristics of soil have been delineated

through specific parameters, viz. particle size distribution (grain size analysis),

porosity, water holding capacity and permeability whereas data for chemical



characterization of soil, viz. pH, electrical conductivity, cation exchange capacity and

sodium absorption ratio have been analyzed.

11.2.6 Biological Environment

Baseline data for flora & fauna has been collected with its family. It was found that,

none of the species of conservation importance exists in the study area and no

endangered species are found in the study area.

11.2.7 Socio-Economic Environment

Socio-economic study includes description of demography, available basic amenities

like housing, health care services, transportation, education facilities. Information on

the above said parameters has been collected to define the socio-economic profile of

the study area (10-km radius).

11.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

Impact identification has been carried out for various activities involved in construction

as well as operational phase of the project and prediction has been done for significant

impacts. The summary of anticipated adverse environmental impacts due to proposed

project and mitigation measures is given below.

11.3.1 Summary of impacts on Air Environment:

(a) During construction phase & Mitigation measures

Main sources of impact during construction phase are due to movement of vehicles &

construction equipment at site, foundation works, transportation of construction

material etc. Water sprinkling in the vicinity of the construction area will be done to

control dust. PUC certified vehicles will be used. Temporary barricades will be provided

to reduce spreading of particulates from construction area.

(b) During operation phase & Mitigation measures

Flue gas emission will be from stack attached with Pellet plant (stacks of 4 nos. of kiln &

4 nos. of D G Sets), stack of DRI Kiln (stacks of 4 nos. of rotary kiln & 4 nos. of D G Sets),

SMS plant (stacks of 4 nos. of induction furnace equipped with suction hood with

adequate capacity & 4 nos. of D G Sets), Power plant (stacks of WHRB & FBC boiler).

Dolochar (by products of DRI Kiln) & imported coal will be used as a fuel. HSD will use

as fuel for D.G. set, which will used on in case of emergency.

Prediction of impacts on air environment is quantified using ISCST3 model. Maximum

Ground level concentrations of 24-hr average for SPM, SO2 & NOx from the proposed

activity are 11.741 g/m3, 8.423 g/m3 and 7.842 g/m3, respectively. These GLCs are

expected to occur at a distance of 1.0 km from the source in S direction. The obtained



GLCs are well within the 24-hourly ambient air quality standards stipulated by CPCB.

However, to mitigate the impact due to the proposed, following pollution control

system along with stack height for all the facilities in the Steel Plant from 11 m to 75 m

depending on the emission volume and pollutants loading is proposed.

Sr. No.

Source Air pollution control equipment Probable pollutants

1. Pellet plant Bag filter PM <50 mg/NM3


2. DRI Kiln Electro Static Precipitators (ESP) PM <50 mg/NM3

3. SMS plant Fume Extraction system with bag filters PM <50 mg/NM3

4. Power plant Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) PM <30 mg/NM3

Apart from the above, Fume extraction system with bag filters, dust suppression

system, covered conveyers etc. will also be installed.

11.3.2 Summary of impacts on Water Environment

(a) Impacts during construction phase & Mitigation measures:

Temporary impacts are likely to occur due to water consumption & sewage generation.

It will not be significant as water requirement would be temporary during construction

phase. Proper sanitation facilities with adequate disposal system will be provided

within the operational plant.

(b) Impacts during operation phase & Mitigation measures:

Fresh water requirement of the unit will be satisfied from bore well. Total water

requirement for the project will be around 1018 KLD; out of which, 905 KLD fresh

water requirement and 113 KLD recycle water (Domestic water after STP, RO

permeate, MEE condensate).


will be no process wastewater generation from the Pellet, DRI, SMS & Rolling Mill

processes, as closed-circuit cooling system will be provided. Only source of wastewater

generation will be cooling tower bleed off, boiler blow down & DM plant regeneration.

Effluent will be treated in ETP. Then, part of the effluent (13 KLD) will be directly

reused for slag cooling and second part of it (95 KLD) will be passed through RO. RO

eject will be taken to Multi Effect Evaporator (MEE). RO permeate (75 KLD) and


plant premises. Hence, unit will achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD).

Domestic wastewater generation will be 20 KLD, which will be utilized for green belt

after treatment given into STP. Hence, no impact on the water environment is

envisaged.



11.3.3 Impacts on Noise quality & Mitigation measures


During construction phase, major sources of noise are vehicle’s movement &

construction activities. High noise producing activities will be restricted to daytime

only. Well maintained equipments will be used to prevent noise. Usage of PPE by

workers will be made compulsory.


During the operation phase, the noise will generate due to the operation of pumps,

compressors, turbines, boiler, blowers, compressors, vehicular movement etc. The

impact is found to be insignificant outside the premises. Acoustic enclosure will be

provided to noise generating machineries. Unit will provide necessary PPEs like

earplugs or earmuffs to all workers working in high noise area. Selection of any new

plant equipment will be made with specification of low noise levels.

11.3.4 Summary of Impacts on Land Environment


The construction activities like excavation, leveling & vehicular movements will change

the landscape, which are expected to be of short duration & insignificant. Preliminary

activities like proper storage of construction materials & proper management will be

done within the project area. Therefore, impact will be negligible. Unit will provide

sanitation facilities for the staff engaged in construction work which will prevent the

impacts on land.


Hazardous wastes will have significant negative impacts if disposed unsystematically.

Unit will provide all required structural facilities like separate hazardous waste storage

room with RCC floor, leachate collection system, and concrete floors within premises.

Hence, no significant negative impact is envisaged on the land environment.

11.3.5 Summary of impact on Socio Economy


As it is a Greenfield project, around 150-200 workers for the construction work will be

required. Local contractors to be employed for construction, so no other issues like

social conflict are envisaged. Temporary employment generated during construction of

project will have beneficial impacts on economic environment.




Project will require about 500-700 persons for its operation, which result into a

positive impact on prevailing socio-economic environment. Project will also have

potential of indirect employment due to the increase transportation activities,

contractual works as well as opportunity of trade. Thus, overall impacts on socio-

economic environment are long term and positive in nature.

11.3.6 Summary of impact on Ecology

There are no protected areas like National Park/Wildlife Sanctuary within the 10 km

radial periphery of the project site so there will not be any significant impact on

ecology.

11.4 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PROGRAMME

The unit will have dedicated Environment Management Cell to monitor and evaluate

the environmental performance and to supervise the EMS and for compliances of EC

provisions to the authorities. Below Post-project monitoring programme will be

followed.

Environment Monitoring Program

Nature of Analysis Frequency of analysis with its analyzer

Parameters No. of samples

Wastewater analysis Monthly by external agency

pH, TDS, SS, COD, BOD, Oil & Grease, etc.

2-3 samples

Stack Monitoring Monthly by external

agency

PM, SO2, NOX All stacks

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Monthly for 24 hours or as per the statutory

conditions by external agency

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX 3-5 locations

Noise level Monthly as per the statutory conditions by

external agency

Noise level 8-10 locations

Fugitive emission

monitoring

Monthly by external

agency

Dust 10-12 locations

Health check-up of workers

As per the statutory guideline

All workers

11.5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

11.5.1 Risk Assessment

Raw material and products are in solid form and non-hazardous nature and will be

stored in separate area and required safety measures will be provided. Necessary safety

measures including integral safety devices, fire-fighting facilities will be provided to

attend any emergency arising due to plant operation.



11.6 PROJECT BENEFITS

Proposed project has a potential for employment of skilled, semi-skilled & unskilled

employees. The direct employment potential is estimated as 500-700 persons and

many others will be indirectly employed. Indirectly, the proposed project will help the

Government by paying different taxes from time to time, which is a part of revenue and

thus, will help in developing the area. The company has allocated a budget of Rs. 5.22

Crore for socio-economy activities, which can lead to improve social infrastructure.

11.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

EMP includes the protection & mitigation measures to be implemented to reduce the

adverse impact on the environment. Management plan of impacts identified is detailed

below:

Air Pollution Management

The flue gases from the Pellet plant will be controlled by Bag Filters and then

discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 31.0 m height. Flue gases from Rotary

kiln of DRI plant will be passed through Electro Static Precipitators (ESPs) and then

discharged into the atmosphere through stack of 48.0 m height. Flue gases from DRI

plant will be passed through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler and after heat recovery; the

gases will be treated in High efficiency ESPs to bring down the particulate emission in

the exhaust gases to below 30 mg/Nm3 and then discharged into the atmosphere

through stack of 75.0 m height. The fugitive emissions from the Induction furnaces will

be sucked through hoods and will pass through a fume extraction system with bag

filters and then the treated gases will be discharged into the atmosphere through 4 nos.

of stacks each of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of emissions from Induction

Furnaces. The outlet dust emission in the exhaust gases will be less than 50 mg/Nm3.

The dust will be pneumatically carried to covered bins.

The flue gases from the FBC boiler will be treated in a high efficiency ESP to bring down

the particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and will be discharged through a stack

of 30.0 m height for effective dispersion of emissions into the atmosphere.

Furthermore, facility for sampling such as ladder, platform, and sampling point will be

provided as per the GPCB guidelines.

To control the fugitive emissions, unit will adopt following mitigation measures.

Dust suppression system (water sprinklers) will be provided in coal unloading

area,



Dust/gas suction system will be provided to control fugitive emission generated

from melting of scrap,

Bag filter will be provided for the extraction of dust particles to the stack

attached with induction furnace,

The Continuous Casting Operation is selected for the production of billets in

SMS,


dust during conveying,

All production shop having high heat emission in them will be designed for

natural ventilation to make use of draft created by the density difference and

selecting effective roof monitors suitable for this purpose,

All internal roads will be concreted to prevent fugitive dust emission due to

vehicular movement,

PPEs will be provided to the workers,

Electro Static Precipitator will be provided to bring down the PM to 50 mg/Nm3

for DRI plant and 30 mg/Nm3 for Power plant,

Fly ash will be stored in sheds,

Greenbelt will be developed around the plant, and

Frequent work area monitoring will be done ensure fugitive emission level.

Water Pollution Management

• There will be no wastewater generation from the pellet, DRI, SMS & Rolling Mill

processes, as closed-circuit cooling system will be provided.

• Only source of wastewater generation will be cooling tower bleed off, boiler blow

down & DM plant regeneration.

• Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after ensuring compliance with

SPCB norms, partly utilized for slag cooling & partly sent to RO followed by MEE to

achieve ZLD.

• Sewage will be treated in Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) and treated water will be

utilized for Greenbelt development.

• Unit will maintain the records for the total water consumption.

• Regular monitoring of working of ETP, RO & MEE.



Solid & Hazardous Waste Management

Hazardous waste Management:



MEE salt will be disposed to approve TSDF site for landfilling. Used oil will be sold to

registered re-processors. Discarded Drums/containers will be sold to registered



Solid waste Management:

Fly Ash will be sold to brick manufacturing unit. Dolochar will be used in FBC power

plant as fuel/brick manufacturing. Slag after crushing and iron removal, used in road


Noise Pollution Management

• Enclosures will be provided to high noise generating machines.

• Acoustic enclosure is provided for D.G. set.

• All the equipment will be designed/operated in such a way that the noise level in

work place shall not exceed 85 dB(A) as per the requirement of OSHA Standard.

• Periodic maintenance of machinery and vehicles will be undertaken to reduce the

noise impact.

• PPEs are provided to the workers working in high noise area.

• Greenbelt will be intensive within premises to prevent the noise pollution.

• Periodic monitoring of noise levels will be done.

Green Belt Development

Total land area is 153061.0 m2. The unit will develop greenbelt in an area of 50500 m2.

Overall greenbelt area will be tune around 33% of the total area of the project.

Additionally, the unit also has plans to develop the greenbelt in areas available outside

the plant premises, if necessary.

11.8 CONCLUSION

Based on the study it is concluded that-

There will be no major impact on water environment as effluent from power plant

will be treated in ETP. Then, partly utilized for slag cooling & partly sent to RO

followed by MEE to achieve ZLD.



Condensate of MEE and RO permeate will be reused/recycled within plant

premises. Thus, reducing fresh water consumption load by reuse/recycle treated

effluent scheme.

Domestic wastewater will be treated in STP and reused in greenbelt development.

Bag filters, ESP will be used as pollution control equipments for control of flue gas

emission.

Fume extraction system with bag filters, dust suppression system, covered

conveyers will also be installed to control fugitive emission.

For noise control, unit will provide necessary PPEs like earplugs or earmuffs to all

workers and selection of any new plant equipment will be made with specification

of low noise levels.

Entire quantity of hazardous waste will be handled and disposed as per Hazardous

& Other Waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.

Greenbelt will be developed in 33% of the total area.

Fire protection and safety measures will be provided.

Direct and indirect employment opportunities will have positive impact.



Chapter-12

Disclosure of Consultant engaged 12.1. Brief resume and Nature of Consultancy Rendered by Shivalik Solid Waste

Management Limited

Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited (SSWML), Himachal Pradesh is an offshoot of

UPL Limited group of companies – Mumbai. UPL Limited is one of the leading players in the

field of Environmental Services in the country.

Environment Impact Assessment Services

SSWML is accredited EIA Consultant under accreditation scheme of National Accreditation

Board for Education & Training (NABET) (Certificate No. NABET/EIA/1619/RA0040,

Valid till 16.02.2019).

Shivalik Solid Waste Management Limited (SSWML), operating their business at Zirakpur,

Punjab is offering high quality technical services in the field of EIA, Environment, Health &

Safety (EHS), and Environmental Monitoring & Laboratory Analytical Services etc. SSWML

is supported by distinguished professionals, engineers, scientists etc. SSWML Professionals

have excellent experience in executing EIA and other environmental projects.

For Environmental Monitoring related work SSWML has in-house laboratory approved by

NABL. The following experts are associated with SSWML for EIA and Environmental

projects. The following experts are associated with SSWML for EIA and Environmental

projects.

SSWML is accredited in following sectors:

Mining of minerals

River Valley, Hydel, Drainage and Irrigation projects

Thermal power plants

Metallurgical Industries (ferrous & non-ferrous) – both primary & secondary

Pesticide industry and pesticide specific intermediates

Oil & Gas transportation pipeline

Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, storage & disposal facilities (TSDFs)

Common Biomedical Waste Treatment Facilities (CBWTFs)

Common Effluent Treatment Plants (CETPs)

Building and large construction projects

Synthetic Organic chemical industry

Isolated storage & handling of hazardous chemicals



Certifications, Recognition & Accreditation obtained

QCI-NABET Accredited EIA consultant

MoEF&CC recognized Environmental Consultant

MoEF&CC approved laboratory

NABL accredited laboratory as per ISO/IEC 17025:2005

ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 & OHSAS 18001: 2007 Certified Organization

Services

Environment Impact Assessment for obtaining Environmental Clearance

Social Impact Assessment

Environment Management Plan

Preparation of Mining Plan

Environmental Monitoring

Ecological and biodiversity Studies

Resettlement & Rehabilitation Action Plan

Environment Due Diligence

Compliance to the conditions of Environmental Clearance

Environment Audit



12.2. Brief about San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd.

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. (SEPL) is accredited as Category-A organization under the QCI-

NABET Scheme for accreditation of EIA consultant Organizations: Version 3 for preparing

EIA-EMP reports in 10 sectors (Certificate No. NABET/EIA/1619/RA0084; Valid till

23.12.2019).

San Envirotech Pvt. Ltd. has started its work in 1990 to serve the environment as a trustee

of next generation with a small infrastructure under the dynamic leadership of Dr.

Mahendra Sadaria. SEPL has wide spectrum of national and multinational clients covering

the industries - Bulk Drugs and Pharmaceuticals, Dyes and Dye Intermediates, Pesticides,

Fertilizers, Chemicals, Cement, Mining, and Infrastructure. During last two decades, SEPL

has been taking care of client’s unique problems and concerns in order to develop cost

effective strategies to meet their regulatory obligations. SEPL focuses on strategic planning

and comprehensive solutions to address both short and long term needs of the clients.

SEPL has in-house multi-disciplinary analytical testing laboratory that is MoEFCC approved

under EP Act. SEPL is also a recognized schedule-II Environmental Auditor appointed by

Gujarat Pollution Control Board as per the directives of the Honorable High Court of

Gujarat. SEPL is also an ISO 9001:2008, 14001:2008 and OHSAS 18001 certified company.

SEPL team consists of qualified & experienced personnel. Experts involved in the

preparation of this EIA/EMP report are given in EIA report as ‘declaration by experts’.